JP7451319B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

In conventional gaming machines, a meter whose display mode can be changed from level 1 to bell 4 is displayed on the image display device, and based on the display mode of the meter becoming level 4, multiple super reach There is one in which any one of the reach effects is executed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2015-221121A

However, in Patent Document 1, the problem is that one of the plurality of reach effects of super reach is only executed based on the change in the display mode of the meter to level 4, and the enjoyment of the game cannot be improved. There is.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve gaming enjoyment.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
sound output means;
a display means;
a variable winning means that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
a control means capable of executing a round game that changes the variable winning means to the first state;
Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a first suggestion performance, a second suggestion performance, a third suggestion performance, and a fourth suggestion performance as the suggestion performance suggesting control to be in the advantageous state. and,
The first development performance can be executed before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is announced, and the first development performance can be performed after the fact that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state as a performance result of the second suggestion performance is announced. A development performance execution means capable of executing a second development performance different from the first development performance;
a chance-up performance execution means capable of executing a chance-up performance with different expectations to be controlled to the advantageous state depending on the number of times the suggestion performance is executed;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is
The third suggestion performance can be executed after the first development performance is executed,
The fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the second development performance is executed,
The chance up effect execution means is
The number of times the chance-up effect is executed while the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times the chance-up effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned chance-up production as follows,
The number of executions of the chance-up effect executed when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is set to be equal to or less than the number of executions of the chance-up effect executed when the second suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned chance-up production,
When the round game is played, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the amount to be awarded regarding the amount of gaming value to be awarded is displayed and the round game is in progress. Displays a round display that suggests that
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that no gaming value has been awarded can be displayed as the award amount display;
If the gaming medium enters the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a count-up display can be displayed, unlike the case where the gaming medium does not enter the variable winning means within the predetermined period ;
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
Suggestion performances that suggest being controlled to the advantageous state include a special suggestion performance (e.g., reach performance I) and a first suggestion performance (for example, Executing multiple types of suggestion performances including reach performance A), second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance B), third suggestion performance (for example, reach performance F), and fourth suggestion performance (for example, reach performance E) Possible suggestive effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10),
It is possible to execute the special development performance as the first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. In the variable display, the part where the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed during the execution of the reach performance A), and the special development is performed after it is announced that the advantageous state will not be controlled as a result of the second suggestion performance. A special development performance different from the performance can be executed as a second development pattern (for example, as shown in Figure 11-8, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ζ, the variable display result ( A development performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 10),
A development suggestion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a development suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the special development performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) In the meter performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, it is decided to execute the meter performance, in the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, the execution of the reach performance E development suggestion performance is determined, After deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG.
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect, which has a higher expectation level than the first suggestion effect (for example, , as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach η, a high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed from the execution of reach performance A, and then a portion where reach performance F is further executed) ,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, super reach In the variable display with the variation pattern of ζ, after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the performance result of reach performance B, the reach performance E development notification performance is executed, and the part where reach performance E is further executed),
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the execution period of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance) L7 is the part longer than L6b, which is the execution period of reach performance E development notification performance),
The special development effects include a primary effect in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and a effect executed after the first effect. A secondary effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the first stage information is displayed in a visible manner; A tertiary presentation (for example, the subsequent presentation shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which subsequent information with a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development performance is executed until it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled is longer than the period from when the special development performance is executed until it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled. The period is shorter (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) The length L13 and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F are the length L12 from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance E ( (the part set longer than the length L11 of the period up to (the notification timing of variable display results)),
moreover,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5),
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened, etc.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display) ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is announced is excessively long, which reduces the interest in the game. In addition to suppressing the decline, in the case where the special suggestion performance is executed after the execution of the special development performance, it is possible to suitably make the player pay attention to the special suggestion performance before being informed that the advantageous state will be controlled. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the following means A. Conventionally, gaming machines, such as those disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-104625, emit gaming media such as game balls into a gaming area using a firing device, and a prize opening provided in the gaming area. When a game medium wins a prize in the winning area and an execution condition (starting condition) is met, multiple types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) are variably displayed on a variable display device, and a predetermined gaming value is displayed based on the display result. There is a pachinko gaming machine that increases the interest of the game by using a so-called variable display game in which it is decided whether or not to award a prize. In such a pachinko game machine, when the variable display of the display symbols in the variable display game completely stops and the stopped symbol mode becomes a specific display mode, an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player occurs. In the jackpot game state, a round game in which the jackpot is opened can be repeatedly executed up to a predetermined upper limit number of times. As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the grand prize opening is opened earlier than the display switching timing of the number of rounds.

However, although the possibility of winning a prize in the big prize opening increases if the game medium is fired before the number of rounds is displayed, it is still not sufficient from the viewpoint of appropriately displaying the number of balls won. Therefore, there was a risk that the players would feel uneasy and their interest in the game would decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened, etc.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display) ),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a timing chart showing the presentation period in each variation pattern. It is a timing chart showing the production period in each variation pattern. It is a timing chart showing the production period in each variation pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the details of the performance in the case of executing the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance, and (B) is a diagram showing a comparison between the first stage performance and the second stage performance. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an image display device. It is an explanatory diagram of a data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the performance control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a look-ahead notice performance setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern and the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read notice effect. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of meter effect determination processing. (A) is a diagram showing whether or not a meter performance is executed and the determination ratio of performance patterns, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of each performance pattern. 5 is a timing chart showing first to fifth timings in each variation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of reach performance E development suggestion performance determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of branch destination suggestion performance decision processing. (A) is a diagram showing whether or not branch destination suggestion performance is executed and the determination ratio of the performance pattern, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the performance pattern of branch destination suggestion performance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of reach performance G development suggestion performance determination processing. (A) is a diagram showing the ratio of ready-to-reach effects determined when hitting the jackpot, (B) is a diagram showing the ratio determining ready-to-reach effects when winning, and (C) is a diagram showing a comparison between reach effects C and D. , (D) is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the determination ratio of reach effect C and reach effect D in the variation pattern of super reach θ and the variation pattern of super reach κ at the time of jackpot, and (E) is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the determination ratio of reach effect C and reach effect D in the variation pattern of super reach θ at the time of jackpot, and (E) It is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the determination ratio of reach effect C and reach effect D in the variation pattern of reach θ and the variation pattern of super reach κ. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a chance up effect decision process. It is an explanatory diagram of an executable period of chance up performance during each reach performance. It is an explanatory diagram of a performance that can be executed as a chance-up performance. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing whether or not the chance-up performance is executed in each reach performance and the performance pattern, and (E) and (F) are explanatory diagrams of the performance pattern of the chance-up performance in each reach performance. be. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the change rate of the display mode of active display in a modification. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing whether or not a branch destination suggestion performance is executed and the determination ratio of a performance pattern in a variable display of a variation pattern of super reach κ in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing whether or not a chance-up effect is executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in a variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in a modified example. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of the length of a revival performance in a modified example. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a diagram showing an example of lighting of a game effect lamp. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various display processes. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a diagram showing an example of a state in which game balls are caught between special variable prize winning ball devices. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various display processes. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is on hold, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
When the player rotates the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are launched toward the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but the starting winning is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol. It should be noted that the "loss" in this pachinko game machine 1 includes the "loss with time saving" which is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). '') may be displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the set value of the second variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 8, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the previous setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, if the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot determination value within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command captured at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display rendering process in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is "2". In this variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., a determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 029SG in embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic part 029SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be explained. This feature section 029SG includes invention 029SG and invention 033SG.

The gaming machine of form 1 of invention 029SG is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
Suggestion performances that suggest being controlled to the advantageous state include a special suggestion performance (e.g., reach performance I) and a first suggestion performance (for example, Executing multiple types of suggestion performances including reach performance A), second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance B), third suggestion performance (for example, reach performance F), and fourth suggestion performance (for example, reach performance E) Possible suggestive effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10),
It is possible to execute the special development performance as the first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. In the variable display, the part where the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed during the execution of the reach performance A), and the special development is performed after it is announced that the advantageous state will not be controlled as a result of the second suggestion performance. A special development performance different from the performance can be executed as a second development pattern (for example, as shown in Figure 11-8, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ζ, the variable display result ( A development performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 10),
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect, which has a higher expectation level than the first suggestion effect (for example, , as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach η, a high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed from the execution of reach performance A, and then a portion where reach performance F is further executed) ,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, super reach In the variable display with the variation pattern of ζ, after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the performance result of reach performance B, the reach performance E development notification performance is executed, and the part where reach performance E is further executed),
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the execution period of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance) L7 is the part longer than L6b, which is the execution period of reach performance E development notification performance),
The special development effects include a primary effect in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and a effect executed after the first effect. A secondary effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the first stage information is displayed in a visible manner; A tertiary presentation (for example, the subsequent presentation shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which subsequent information with a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development performance is executed until it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled is longer than the period from when the special development performance is executed until it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled. The period is shorter (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance I (variable display result notification timing) The length L13 and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F are the length L12 from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance E ( (The part set longer than the length L11 of the period up to (the notification timing of variable display results)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until it is announced that the advantageous state is controlled becomes excessively long, and the game interest is reduced. In addition to suppressing the decline, in the case where a special suggestion performance is executed after the execution of a special development performance, it is possible to suitably make the player pay attention to the special suggestion performance before being informed that the situation is controlled to be advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 2 of invention 029SG is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The performance period of the second suggestion performance is longer than the performance period of the first suggestion performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach performance B is longer than the execution period of the reach performance A (the part set longer than the period length L1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the second suggestion effect for a longer period of time than the first suggestion effect, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. In addition, unlike the first suggestion performance, the second suggestion performance does not execute the development performance before the performance result is announced, so even if the special development performance is not performed, the corresponding It is possible to surely draw the attention of the player to whether or not control to an advantageous state is reported as a performance result of the 2-suggestion performance.

The gaming machine of Form 3 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 1 or Form 2,
Development suggestion performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing at least a development suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the special development performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) In the meter performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, it is decided to execute the meter performance, in the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, the execution of the reach performance E development suggestion performance is determined, After determining execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in -29, the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 10 is executed.
The development suggestion performance execution means is
As the development suggestion performance, a special development suggestion performance that suggests execution of the special development performance can be executed both during the execution period of the first suggestion performance and during the execution period of the second suggestion performance ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 and 11-8, in the variable display of the variation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, and super reach η, when reach effect A is being executed and Part where meter effect can be performed while reach effect B is being executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during the execution period of the first suggestion performance and during the execution period of the second suggestion performance, it is possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the special development performance by the special development suggestion performance. can.

The gaming machine of Form 4 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
When the special suggestion performance is executed without executing the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, the development performance execution means executes the special development performance for the first time before the special suggestion performance is executed. (For example, as shown in Figures 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach λ, it is possible to execute as three development patterns without going through the execution of reach effect A or reach effect B. At the second timing, the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage at once and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance are not executed, the special development performance is executed and the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the highly anticipated special suggestion performance will be executed. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 5 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 4,
During the period from when the special development performance is executed to when the special suggestion performance is executed and it is announced that the advantageous state is controlled, the third suggestion performance is executed after the special development performance is executed. (For example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of the high-expected reach performance development notification performance to the time when the reach performance is controlled to be in the advantageous state is announced). The length L13 of the period up to the end timing of I (notification timing of variable display results) is set longer than the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by lengthening the period until notification when a highly anticipated special development performance is executed, it is possible to effectively increase expectations for being controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine according to Form 6 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
Development suggestion performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing at least a development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) that suggests execution of the special development performance. Deciding to execute the meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, deciding to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, After deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in -29, the variable display processing shown in FIG. 10 is executed.
The development suggestion performance execution means includes a special development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance) that suggests execution of the special development performance by changing the performance mode in stages, and a special development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance) that suggests the execution of the special development performance by changing the performance mode in stages. It is possible to perform a special development suggestion performance (for example, a reach performance E development suggestion performance) that suggests the execution of a special development performance,
The rate at which the performance mode changes to the specific number of stages in the special development suggestion performance is higher than the rate at which the performance mode changes to the specific number of stages in the special development suggestion performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-24 and 11-54 As shown, the meter effect changes the display mode of the meter 029SG005M in 5 steps (6 steps if you include the state where the meter effect is not executed), whereas the reach effect E development suggestion effect changes the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image. (the part where changes in two steps),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first suggestion performance in which a special development suggestion performance is executed and the second suggestion performance in which a special development suggestion performance is executed. Since it is easier to change to a specific number of stages than with a suggestive presentation, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the number of stages changes to a specific number, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Form 7 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 6,
The period in which the special development suggestion performance is performed is longer than the period in which the special development suggestion performance is performed (for example, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, the period in which the special development suggestion performance is executed is In the variable display with a variable pattern, the length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach performance E development suggestion performance executable period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the execution of the special development performance is suggested, the fourth suggestion performance indicates that the third suggestion performance, which has higher expectations than the first suggestion performance, will be executed after the special development performance is executed. Since the suggestion can be made for a longer period of time than the execution, the interest of the special development suggestion production can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 8 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 6 or Form 7,
In the case where the second suggestion performance is executed, the development suggestion performance execution means does not execute the special development suggestion performance until the performance result of the second suggestion performance is notified (for example, a reach performance). E development suggestion performance is the part that can be executed after the variable display result (missing) is announced as the performance result of reach performance B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the special development suggestion performance is executed during the execution of the second suggestion performance, the player recognizes that the player is informed that the player will not be controlled to an advantageous state as a result of the second suggestion performance. It is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest due to

The gaming machine according to Form 9 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 8,
An advantageous result suggesting performance (for example, a chance-up performance) that suggests that the performance result of the suggesting performance will be an advantageous result for the player during the execution of the suggesting performance, the structure constituting the advantageous result suggesting performance. Advantageous result suggestion performance execution means that makes the suggestion based on the number of executions of the performance (for example, the variable display shown in FIG. 10 after the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the chance up performance in the chance up performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-31) (a part that executes mid-production processing),
The number of executions of the constituent effects when the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of executions of the constituent effects when the first suggestion effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-34). Thus, while the reach effect F is being executed, a total of three effects are displayed as effects that constitute the chance-up effect: the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation promotion image. While it is possible to execute the chance-up effect in Pattern S, Pattern T, and Pattern U, while reach effect A is being executed, the reach title is displayed in red as a part of the chance-up effect. A total of two performances of the movement of the movable body 32 can be executed (the part where the chance-up production can be executed in pattern P and pattern Q),
The number of executions of the constituent effects when the fourth suggestion effect is being executed is less than or equal to the number of executions of the constituent effects when the second suggestion effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-34). As shown in the above, while the reach effect E is being executed, a total of two effects can be executed as effects that constitute the chance increase effect: the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 (the chance increase effect is set to pattern S and pattern Q). On the other hand, during the execution of reach effect B, a total of three effects, including the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of cut-in image 029SG200, are performed as effects that constitute the chance-up effect. The part where the effect can be executed (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern P, pattern Q, pattern R),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the case where the special development performance is executed and the third suggestion performance is further executed before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is announced, the first suggestion performance is executed. By increasing the number of executions of the component effects when the third suggestion effect is being executed than when the third suggestion effect is being executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect of the third suggestion effect more favorably. Regarding the case where the special development performance is executed and the 4th suggestion performance is further executed after it is announced that the control is not in an advantageous state as a result of the 2nd suggestion performance, the configuration performance when the 4th suggestion performance is being executed. By making the number of executions of the constituent effects less than or equal to the number of executions of the constituent effects when the second suggestion effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent the player from drawing too much attention to the performance result of the fourth suggestion effect. You can improve your interest in gaming.

The gaming machine according to Form 10 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 9,
The advantageous result suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing the advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, chance up performance) in a plurality of modes including a common mode,
Even if the advantageous result suggestion performance of the common aspect is executed, the expectation level differs depending on the type of the suggestion performance in which the advantageous result suggestion performance was executed (for example, as shown in Modification Example 029SG-12, reach title (The part where the jackpot expectation level differs depending on whether the common presentation of the red display and the operation of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach presentations A to F.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of modes of advantageous result suggestion effects and to draw the player's attention to which suggestion effect is executed during which common modes of advantageous result suggestion effects are executed. As a result, you can increase your interest in playing games.

The gaming machine of Form 11 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 9 or Form 10,
The suggestion performance execution means is capable of displaying an expectation level corresponding image corresponding to the expectation level of the suggestion performance when executing the suggestion performance, and displays the expectation level corresponding image when the advantageous result suggestion performance is executed. (For example, as shown in Modified Example 029SG-5, when changing the text of the reach title image to red from the middle as a chance-up effect, it is displayed together with the reach title image. Changing the display mode of the expectation image showing the expected jackpot expectation (increasing the number of stars displayed as the expectation image),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the image corresponding to the expectation level changes as the advantageous outcome suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to increase attention to the image corresponding to the expectation level, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of the expectation level of the suggestion effect. can be recognized.

The gaming machine of Form 12 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine described in Forms 1 to 11,
A specific image suggestion effect (for example, deformation) that is different from the suggestion effect and that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled by the display mode of a specific image (for example, active display) displayed during the suggestion effect. A specific image suggestion effect execution means (for example, an active display effect provided in the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-57 as a modified example 029SG-1) that can execute The active display is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes in the display area 029SG005F, and the jackpot expectation level is varied depending on which display mode the active display is displayed.
The specific image suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing a common specific image suggestion performance as the specific image suggestion performance in common among all of the different types of suggestion performances (for example, by setting the active display to a white round shape, Areas that can be displayed as blue circles and red circles),
The rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect that is executed before the special development effect in the first development pattern is that the common specific image suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed. Lower than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during execution of the third suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as modification 029SG-1, variable display as a result of reach effect A) In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, in which the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed before the result is announced and the reach performance F is further executed, an active display is displayed while the reach performance A is being executed. The rate P2 at which the aspect changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle is the same as when the display aspect of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while reach effect F is being executed. (portion lower than P3),
The rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect that is executed after the special development effect is executed in the first development pattern is the same as the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern. is higher than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the fourth suggestion effect that is executed after the execution of the fourth suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. The rate P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect F in the variable display of the variation pattern of the reach η is the effect of the reach effect B. Display mode of active display during execution of reach effect E in variable display of variable pattern of super reach ζ in which reach effect E development notification effect is executed after variable display result (missing) is announced and reach effect E is further executed is higher than P1, where the rate of change from white or blue to red is higher than P1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect is executed and the third suggestion effect is executed, the third suggestion effect is executed by executing the specific image suggestion effect before the start of the special development effect. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will recognize this in advance, and in the third suggestion performance and the fourth suggestion performance, the common specific image suggestion performance is appropriately executed according to the level of expectation, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. .

The gaming machine according to Form 13 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 12,
The specific image suggestion performance execution means changes the display mode of the specific image from a first mode (for example, a white circle or a blue circle) to a second mode (for example, It can be changed into any of multiple aspects including red round shape),
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development effect is lower than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode after the development effect is executed ( For example, as shown in modification 029SG-2, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach η, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while the reach effect F is being executed. The proportion P3 of the change in shape is set higher than the proportion P2 of the display mode of the active display changing from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during execution of reach effect A, and super reach ζ In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern, the rate P1 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while the reach effect E is being executed is set to (The part where the display mode is set higher than the rate at which the display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the degree of expectation that is controlled to an advantageous state depending on the display mode of the specific image, and the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development effect, so that the game It is possible to reduce the possibility that interest in the game will decrease due to the player being recognized in advance as having high expectations.

The gaming machine of Form 14 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 12 or Form 13,
When the special suggestion performance is executed without executing the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, the development performance execution means executes the special development performance for the first time before the special suggestion performance is executed. (For example, as shown in Figure 11-9, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, high expectations can be achieved from the timing before reach when reach effect A or reach effect B is not executed. The part where reach performance development notification performance is executed),
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the special suggestion effect in the third development pattern is the rate at which the specific image is displayed after the special suggestion effect is executed in the third development pattern. The mode is higher than the rate at which the mode changes to the second mode (for example, as shown in Modification Example 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the display mode of the active display is changed before the start of reach effect I) The rate P5 at which the icon changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle is determined by the display mode of the active display changing from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of reach effect I. (the part set higher than the ratio P6),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by changing the display mode of the specific image to the second mode before the special suggestion performance, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the special suggestion performance will be executed.

The gaming machine according to Form 15 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 12 to 14,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display,
A suspension storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process shown in FIGS. 11-14) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a suspension storage;
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-17) capable of determining that the advanced effect is executed when starting the variable display;
Regarding the variable display corresponding to the suspended memory, a determining means capable of determining that the advanced effect is executed before the determination by the determining means (for example, in the winning random value determination process of Modification 029SG-4, the CPU 103 When the variation pattern (variation category) is determined to be super reach, it is further determined which super reach variation pattern from super reach α to super reach λ (which of reach effect A to reach effect I is executed during variable display) (the part that determines whether the
Equipped with
The specific image suggestion performance execution means includes, as the specific image suggestion performance, a performance that suggests that the special development performance is to be executed based on the determination result of the determination unit, and a performance that suggests that the special development performance is to be executed. (For example, in Modified Example 029SG-4, in addition to a round shape, triangles, squares, star shapes, etc. are provided as display formats for the pending memory table display, and the pending memory display is Depending on whether the shape is displayed, it is possible to suggest which of the reach effects will develop into reach effect E, reach effect F, reach effect G, reach effect H, and reach effect I),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image suggestion performance even before the start of the variable display, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Form 1 of invention 033SG is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Suggestion performances that suggest being controlled to the advantageous state include a special suggestion performance (for example, reach performance I), and a first suggestion performance that has a lower expectation level of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion performance (for example, , reach performance C), second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance D), and special suggestion performance (for example, reach performance G). (a part in which the CPU 120 executes the variable display processing shown in FIG. 10);
It is possible to execute a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, super reach In the variable display of the variation pattern of κ, the part where the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D), the part where the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is executed After it is announced that the advantageous state will not be controlled as a result of the performance, a special development performance different from the special development performance can be executed as a second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the variation of super reach θ In the variable display of the pattern, the development effect execution means (for example, the part where the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D) (a part in which the CPU 120 executes the variable display processing shown in FIG. 10);
In the first development pattern, before the special development effect is executed, a predetermined effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, the precursor effect shown in FIG. (the part that executes the variable display processing shown),
Equipped with
The first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance have different expectations (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-30(C), reach performance D has a higher jackpot expectation level than reach performance C),
The suggestive performance execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, the super reach κ In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern, the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed from the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D, and the part where reach performance I is further executed),
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the super reach In the variable display with a variation pattern of θ, after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, reach performance G development notification performance is executed, and then reach performance G is further executed. part),
When the special development performance is not executed after the predetermined performance is executed, it is possible to execute a specific suggestion performance that is different from the special suggestion performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, In the variable display of the super reach ι in a variable pattern, after the precursor performance is executed, the reach performance H development notification performance is executed, and then the reach performance H is further executed),
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, the rate at which the special development effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the variable display result is In the case of a jackpot, that is, when selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the determination ratio of the super reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed during the variable display is variable. The portion higher than the determination rate of the super reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) where the reach effect G development notification effect is executed during the display),
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is the length of the execution period of the reach performance G development notification performance) The part that is set longer than L8),
The special development effects include a primary effect in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and a effect executed after the first effect. A secondary effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the first stage information is displayed in a visible manner; A tertiary presentation (for example, the subsequent presentation shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which subsequent information with a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visibly displayed,
The rate at which the special development performance is performed after the predetermined performance is performed in the first suggestion performance, and the rate at which the special development performance is performed after the predetermined performance is performed in the second suggestion performance. Different (for example, as shown in Figures 11-30 (A) to 11-30 (C), when reach effect C is executed, the rate at which high expectation level reach effect development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect) is the part that is higher than the rate at which the high-expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed after the precursor performance when reach performance D is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to diversify the presentation by combining the types of suggestion presentation and the type of development presentation, and it is also possible to create a predetermined relationship between suggestion presentation and development presentation. It can improve the interest of the performance.

The gaming machine of Form 2 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The development performance execution means executes a specific development performance different from the special development performance and the special development performance before execution of the specific suggestion performance if the special development performance is not performed after the predetermined performance is executed. possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the execution of the precursor performance),
A development advance performance execution means capable of executing a development advance performance before the special development performance or the specific development performance is executed (for example, a reach performance H development notification performance in a variable display of a variation pattern of super reach ι) (The part where the advance performance is executed from a timing earlier than the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ),
The development advance performance execution means is capable of executing the development advance performance that is common both when the special development performance is executed and when the specific development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-51). , the part where a common form of pre-production is performed in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ι and the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by executing the pre-development performance, it is possible to increase attention to the development performance, and to draw the player's attention to whether the special development performance or the specific development performance will be executed as the development performance. You can improve your interest in gaming.

The gaming machine of Form 3 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Form 1 or Form 2,
The development performance execution means executes a specific development performance different from the special development performance and the special development performance before execution of the specific suggestion performance if the special development performance is not performed after the predetermined performance is executed. possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the execution of the precursor performance),
A special development suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the special development performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance of pattern Z that displays the branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z on the image display device 5), and a specific development that suggests the execution of the specific development performance. A suggestive effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect of pattern Y that displays a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y on the image display device 5) and a common development suggestion effect that suggests the execution of either the special development effect or the specific development effect (for example, , a branch destination suggestion effect of pattern X that displays the branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X on the image display device 5); After determining execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the determination process, the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 is executed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to which of the special development suggestion performance, specific development suggestion performance, and common development suggestion performance will be executed as the development suggestion performance, the enjoyment of the game can be improved. .

The gaming machine of Form 4 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
The second development is greater than the first difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern. The second difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the pattern and the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern, is smaller (for example, 11-30 ( As shown in D), the variation pattern of super reach κ in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed before the performance result is announced as reach performance C or reach performance D, and the reach performance Regarding the variation pattern of super reach θ in which reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G are executed after the performance result is announced as performance C or reach performance D, when the variable display result becomes a jackpot, the super reach κ The difference between the rate at which reach effect C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variable pattern is 60%, while the difference in the rate at which reach effect D is executed with the variable display of the variable pattern of super reach θ is (The part where the difference between the rate at which C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is 40%),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, depending on whether the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is executed, it is either the first development pattern in which the special development effect is executed or the second development pattern in which the special development effect is executed. Since it becomes possible to guess which of the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance will be executed, it is possible to make the game more interesting.

The gaming machine of Form 5 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Form 4,
The rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern are the same or approximately the same (for example, modification 029SG- As shown in 10, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, the execution determination ratio of reach performance C and the execution determination ratio of reach performance D are the same),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first suggestion effect is executed or the second suggestion effect is executed, it is expected that the second development pattern is the one in which the special development effect is executed. This will increase your interest in playing games.

The gaming machine of Form 6 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Form 4 or Form 5,
The degree of expectation when the first suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern is the same or substantially the same as the degree of expectation when the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern. (For example, as shown in Modification Example 029SG-11, regarding the variable display of super reach θ in a variation pattern, the jackpot expectation level and the execution of reach effect D are determined when execution of reach effect C is determined. (the part where the expected jackpot is the same as when
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first suggestion effect is executed or the second suggestion effect is executed, when the special development effect is executed, it is possible to be in an advantageous state. Since the player can look forward to the future, his/her interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine according to Form 7 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 6,
a first advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance) that suggests that the performance result of the first suggestion performance will be an advantageous result for the player during execution of the first suggestion performance; and the second suggestion. Execute an advantageous result suggestion performance capable of executing a second advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance) that suggests that the performance result of the second suggestion performance will be an advantageous result for the player during execution of the performance. Means (for example, a portion that executes the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the chance up effect in the chance up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31),
Development suggestion performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing at least a development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) that suggests execution of the special development performance. Deciding to execute the meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, deciding to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, After deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in -29, a part that executes the variable displaying effect processing shown in FIG. 10);
Equipped with
The rate at which the development suggestion performance is executed when the first suggestion performance is executed in the first development pattern is the same as the rate at which the development suggestion performance is executed when the second suggestion performance is executed in the first development pattern. The rate at which the effect is executed is different (for example, as shown in Modified Example 029SG-6, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach κ, the case where the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is reach effect C and the case where the reach effect is (a part where it is possible to decide whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion performance at different rates depending on the case of performance D),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the execution ratio of the development suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the special development performance is different between the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, the execution ratio of the development suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the special development performance is different. Since the game can be played in a suitable manner, it is possible to improve the game's interest.

The gaming machine of Form 8 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
a first advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance) that suggests that the performance result of the first suggestion performance will be an advantageous result for the player during execution of the first suggestion performance; and the second suggestion. Execute an advantageous result suggestion performance capable of executing a second advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance) that suggests that the performance result of the second suggestion performance will be an advantageous result for the player during execution of the performance. Means (for example, a portion that executes the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the chance up effect in the chance up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31),
Development suggestion performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing at least a development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) that suggests execution of the special development performance. Deciding to execute the meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, deciding to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, After deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in -29, a part that executes the variable displaying effect processing shown in FIG. 10);
Equipped with
When the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect is the same as the first suggestion effect in the first development pattern. When the second suggestion performance is executed, the rate at which the second advantageous result suggestion performance is performed during the execution of the second suggestion performance is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as modification example 029SG-13, Regarding the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ, in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I are executed before the variable display result (missing) is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D. , a part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the chance-up effect at different rates depending on whether the execution of the reach effect C is determined and the case where the execution of the reach effect D is determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the execution ratio of the first advantageous result suggestion presentation and the second advantageous outcome suggestion presentation that suggest that the presentation result will be an advantageous result is different between the first suggestion presentation and the second suggestion presentation. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suggest the result of the performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 9 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Form 7 or Form 8,
The development performance execution means executes a specific development performance different from the special development performance and the special development performance before execution of the specific suggestion performance if the special development performance is not performed after the predetermined performance is executed. possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the execution of the precursor performance),
The degree of relationship between the first advantageous result suggestion performance and the suggestion by the second advantageous result suggestion performance is determined by the specific development performance or the special development performance after the execution of the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance. The relationship with respect to the execution of is higher than the relationship with respect to the effect of the specific development effect or the effect of the suggestion effect executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28(A) As shown, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion performance and the performance pattern differs depending on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and the determination ratio does not differ depending on the variable display result. , the presence or absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion performance and the performance pattern are whether or not it develops into any of reach performance G to reach performance I after reach performance C and reach performance D are executed, and whether these reach performance G to reach performance The part that is designed to be determined depending on which of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the suggestion by the first special development performance and the second special development performance causes a specific development performance or special development performance to be executed close to the execution time of the first special development performance or the second special development performance. Therefore, by executing the first special development performance and the second special development performance, attention to the specific development performance or the special development performance can be increased, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

The gaming machine according to Form 10 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 7 to 9,
The development performance execution means executes a specific development performance different from the special development performance and the special development performance before execution of the specific suggestion performance if the special development performance is not performed after the predetermined performance is executed. possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the execution of the precursor performance),
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance is executed differs before and after the execution of the specific development performance or the special development performance (for example, as shown in Modification 029SG-12) (The part where the jackpot expectation level differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance, thereby increasing the degree of attention to either the first development pattern or the second development pattern.

The gaming machine according to Form 11 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 7 to 10,
The notification mode of the performance results in the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance is a first notification mode in which it is simply notified that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, super reach In the variable display of the variation pattern of γ, there is a part where the variable display ends after the variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach effect C or reach effect D) and the part where the variable display ends after the variable display is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled. A second notification mode in which it is reported that the control is in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-7, the variable display result is once notified that the result is a loss as a result of reach effect A to reach effect D, and then again It has a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) that notifies that the variable display result is a jackpot,
When the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is notified in the first notification mode, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance is executed is The ratio is the same as the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion presentation or the second advantageous result suggestion presentation is executed when the presentation result of the first suggestion presentation or the second suggestion presentation is notified in the second notification mode (e.g. , as shown in modification 029SG-7, when the performance results (variable display results) of reach performance C and reach performance D are notified in the first notification mode, the rate at which branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z and the rate at which the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z when the performance results (variable display results) of reach performance C and reach performance D are notified in the second notification mode are the same),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by notifying the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance in the second notification mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and the performance of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance The first advantageous result suggestion presentation or the second advantageous result suggestion presentation is different between the case where the result is announced in the first notification mode and the case where the presentation result of the first suggestion presentation or the second suggestion presentation is notified in the second notification mode. Since the process for determining the execution of the process can be shared, the amount of data required for the process can be reduced.

The gaming machine according to Form 12 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 7 to 11,
As a notification mode of the performance results in the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, a first notification mode in which it is simply notified that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, super reach In the variable display of the variation pattern of γ, there is a part where the variable display ends after the variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach effect C or reach effect D) and the part where the variable display ends after the variable display is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled. A second notification mode in which it is announced that the control is in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-7, the variable display result is once announced as a loss as the performance result of reach performance A to reach performance D, and then again It has a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) that notifies that the variable display result is a jackpot,
When the special development performance is executed after the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is notified in the first notification mode, in the suggestion performance executed after the special development performance, the In the case where it is announced that the control will be in an advantageous state, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance is executed is that the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance is executed when the notification is made in the second notification mode is different (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-8, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance is executed is the reach performance C or After the reach performance D is executed and it is reported that the variable display result is a failure as the performance result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, and the reach performance G When it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot as a performance result (when the variable display is executed in the super reach θ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-7)), the super reach θ jackpot variation pattern The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed during the variable display is the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display where the effect (variable display result) of reach effect C or reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode. (the proportion that differs from the ratio),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is executed, the first advantageous result is suggested depending on whether the special development performance is executed before being informed that the control will be in an advantageous state. Since the rate at which the performance or the second advantageous result suggesting performance is executed can be varied, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine according to Form 13 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 7 to 12,
The advantageous result suggestion performance execution means executes a plurality of advantageous result suggestion performances including the first advantageous result suggestion performance and the second advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, branch destination suggestion performances of pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z). is executable,
The execution rate of the special development effect differs depending on which of the advantageous outcome suggestion effects is executed (for example, as shown in Figure 11-28, if the branch destination suggestion effect is pattern X, pattern Y, or pattern Z) The execution rate of the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance differs depending on which stage it is executed in),
During the execution of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance, the special development performance is not executed when the special advantageous result suggestion performance with the highest execution rate of the special development performance or the special suggestion performance is executed. In this case, the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance being executed is a performance result that notifies that the performance is controlled to be in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in modification example 029SG-9, There are cases where the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is not executed even though the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in the performance pattern Z, or the case where the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is not executed but the reach performance I (The part where it is announced that the variable display result will be a jackpot if it is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and also to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special development performance will be executed when the special advantageous result suggestion performance or the special suggestion performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 11-1(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 029SG. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-1(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be set arbitrarily according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-1 (B), determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot" (predetermined result). ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be used when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state where probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variation. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a jackpot opening notification command that notifies that the jackpot is open during the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable or non-probable variable) as a winning determination result. In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 11-1(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-2, in this feature section 029SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determining the display result of ordinary figures are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 029SG154, to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating one of the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating the number of parts may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " 997'' range.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 11-3 shows an example of the structure of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 029SG, a common special figure display result judgment table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result and a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table that will be used.

In the special figure display result determination table in this characteristic section 029SG, the special figure display results are determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random value MR1 for determining the graphic display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used to determine whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this feature section 029SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 029SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 029SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state.

FIG. 11-4(A) shows an example of the structure of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 029SG determines whether the jackpot type is one of multiple types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 029SG using FIG. 11-4(B), in this feature section 029SG, as jackpot types, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the end of the jackpot game state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeated five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. . The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state changes from the normal state. This is a so-called consecutive winning situation, which occurs continuously without any intervention.

On the other hand, the time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 029SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 11-4(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 11-4 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot type of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the type of jackpot may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 11-5 shows a variation pattern in this characteristic part 029SG. In this feature part 029SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed. In addition, in this feature part 029SG, one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this feature part 029SG, the super reach variation patterns are super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, super reach δ, super reach ε, super reach ζ, super reach η, super reach θ, super reach ι, super reach Although 11 types of variation patterns of reach κ and super reach λ are provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and only 12 or more or 10 or less types of super reach variation patterns may be provided.

In addition, the super reach variation pattern in this feature part 029SG is the variation pattern of super reach α, the variation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-2), the variation pattern where the result is out of the jackpot (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of super reach β. As a fluctuation pattern, there is a fluctuation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-3), a fluctuation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PA2-3), and a fluctuation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-4) as a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ. ), a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the variable display result deviates as a variation pattern for super reach δ, a variation pattern in which the variable display result deviates as a variation pattern in super reach ε (PA2-5), and a variation pattern in which the variable display result deviates as a variation pattern in super reach ε. A variation pattern (PA2-6) in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-5) as a variation pattern in super reach ζ, a variation pattern in which the result is a jackpot (PA2-7), and a variation pattern in super reach η A variation pattern (PB1-6) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, a variation pattern (PA2-8) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, and a variation pattern (PB1-7) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a variation pattern of super reach θ. The fluctuation pattern that results in a loss (PA2-9), the fluctuation pattern that results in a variable display result as a jackpot (PB1-8) as a fluctuation pattern of super reach ι, the fluctuation pattern that results in a loss (PA2-10), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ. As a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-9), a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PA2-11), and a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-10) is a fluctuation pattern of super reach λ. ) and a deviation pattern (PA2-12) are provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 029SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern With some exceptions, the longer the special symbol fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In particular, the special symbol variation time of the super reach β variation pattern is set longer than the special symbol variation time of the super reach alpha variation pattern, and the special symbol variation time of the super reach γ variation pattern is set to be longer than that of the super reach beta variation pattern. The special figure variation time of the super reach δ variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach γ variation pattern, and the special figure variation time of the super reach ε variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach δ variation pattern. The variation time is set longer than the special symbol variation time of the Super Reach δ variation pattern, and the special symbol variation time of the Super Reach ζ variation pattern is set longer than the special symbol variation time of the Super Reach ε variation pattern. Therefore, the special symbol fluctuation time of the super reach η fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special symbol fluctuation time of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern, and the special symbol fluctuation time of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern is set longer than that of the super reach η fluctuation pattern. The special figure variation time of the super reach ι variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach θ variation pattern, and the special figure variation time of the super reach κ variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach θ variation pattern. The fluctuation time is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern.

Note that among these super reach α variation patterns to super reach κ variation patterns, the super reach δ variation pattern and the super reach ε variation pattern do not have a variation pattern in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot. In other words, among these super reach α variation patterns to super reach κ variation patterns, of the variation patterns excluding the super reach δ variation pattern and the super reach ε variation pattern, the super reach α variation pattern has the shortest special symbol variation time and The jackpot expectation level is set low, and the jackpot expectation level is set to increase as the special symbol fluctuation time becomes longer.

Furthermore, in this feature section 029SG, a super reach λ variation pattern is provided as a super reach variation pattern that has a higher jackpot expectation than the super reach κ variation pattern. The super reach λ variation pattern is exceptionally set so that the special symbol variation time is longer than the super reach ζ variation pattern and shorter than the super reach η variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (A), the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PB1-2) changes the length of the execution period as a reach effect of Super Reach during variable display. is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect A of L1 is executed and a variable display result is notified as the result of the ready-to-reach effect A. As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (B), the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern (PA2-3, PB1-3) has an execution period length of L2 as a reach effect of Super Reach during variable display. This is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-reach effect B of (L2>L1) is executed and a variable display result is notified as the effect of the ready-to-reach effect B.

As shown in FIGS. 11-7(A) and 11-7(B), the super reach α variation pattern and the super reach β variation pattern vary from the variable display start timing to the end timing of the reach effect (notification of variable display results). It is also a variation pattern in which it is possible to execute a meter effect that suggests the execution of a high-expectation reach effect development notification effect over the period (timing). In addition, as mentioned above, the length L2 of the execution period of reach effect B is set to be longer than the length L1 of the execution period of reach effect A, so the length of the execution period of the meter effect in the super reach β variation pattern is The length L5 is set to be longer than the length L4 of the meter performance executable period in the super reach α variation pattern (L5>L4).

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (C), the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4, PB1-4) is used as reach effect C or reach effect D for super reach during variable display. This is a variation pattern in which a variable display result is announced as a result of these ready-to-reach effects C or D. Incidentally, the execution period of both the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D is set to the length L3. In addition, the super reach γ variation pattern is such that during the execution period of reach effect C and reach effect D, after the variable display result is announced as the effect of reach effect C and reach effect D, reach effect H is further executed. Which one will be executed? The reach performance H development notification performance that notifies you that reach performance H development notification performance will notify you that either reach performance F or reach performance I will be executed. It is also a fluctuating pattern that allows execution of a branch destination suggestion effect.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (D), the super reach δ variation pattern (PA2-5) is a reach effect B with an execution period of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. After executing and notifying that the variable display result is a failure, it is possible to execute a reach performance E development suggestion performance that suggests development to reach performance E (length of executable period for reach performance E development suggestion performance: L6a) This is a fluctuating pattern that does not ultimately develop into reach effect E and notifies the failure. In addition, the super reach δ fluctuation pattern, like the super reach β fluctuation pattern, is a fluctuation that allows the meter performance to be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach performance (length of the meter performance executable period: L5). It is also a pattern, and the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-8 (E), the super reach ε fluctuation pattern (PA2-6) is used as reach effect of super reach during variable display, such as reach effect C or reach effect D (whichever reach effect). The length of the performance execution period is also variable. After executing L3) and notifying that the display result is a failure, it is possible to execute the reach performance G development suggestion performance that suggests the development to the reach performance G, and finally reach This is a fluctuating pattern that notifies performance G without developing it. Further, the super reach ε variation pattern is also a variation pattern that allows execution of a branch destination suggestion performance during the execution period of the reach performance C and the reach performance D.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-8 (F), the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-5) has an execution period length of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. After executing the reach performance B and notifying that the variable display result is a failure, the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed, and the reach performance E development notification performance ( Length of the execution period of the ready-to-reach effect E development notification effect: This is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-reach effect E is executed after executing L6b). The super reach ζ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the meter effect can be executed (length of the meter effect executable period: L5) from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach effect B. The length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance executable period. In addition, the length L6b of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect is set shorter than the length L5 of the meter effect executable period. In addition, in the super reach ζ variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect E development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect E (the notification timing of the variable display result) is set to L11.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (G), the super reach η variation pattern (PA2-8, PB1-6) executes reach effect A as a reach effect of super reach during variable display, A high-expectation reach performance that notifies you that from the middle of the reach performance A, the reach performance A will be replaced by a reach performance with a high expectation of a jackpot (for this feature, reach performance F or reach performance I, which will be described later). This is a variation pattern in which the development notification performance is executed over L7 (L7>L6b), which is longer than the execution period length L6b of the reach effect E development notification effect, and further the reach effect F is executed. In addition, with the super reach η variation pattern, the meter effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the timing when reach effect A switches to the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (when reach effect A is in the middle of high expectation reach Since the performance is switched to the performance development notification performance, the length of the meter performance executable period is also a variation pattern of L4'), which is shorter than L4. In addition, in the super reach η variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F (notification timing of variable display results) is the reach performance in the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern. The length of the period from the start timing of the E development notification performance to the end timing of the ready-to-reach performance E is set to be longer than L11 (L12>L11).

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-8 (H), the super reach θ variation pattern (PA2-9, PB1-7) is used as reach effect C or reach effect D for super reach during variable display. (The length of the execution period of any reach effect is L3), and after informing that the variable display result is a failure in these reach effect C or reach effect D, it is possible to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect. , Furthermore, reach performance G development notification performance that notifies the development to reach performance G is executed over L8 (L7>L8), which is shorter than the execution period L7 of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance. This is a variation pattern in which a reach effect G is further executed. Moreover, the super reach θ variation pattern is also a variation pattern that allows execution of a branch destination suggestion performance during the execution period of the reach performance C and the reach performance D.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-9 (I), the super reach ι variation pattern (PA2-10, PB1-8) is used as reach effect C or reach effect D for super reach during variable display. A reach performance H development notification is executed to inform that the reach performance H will be developed, and a preliminary performance and a precursor performance will be executed in place of the reach performance C or reach performance D from the middle of these reach performance C or reach performance D, and that the reach performance will further develop into reach performance H. This is a variation pattern in which a performance is executed and a reach performance H is executed. Further, the super reach ι variation pattern is also a variation pattern that allows execution of branch destination suggestion performance during the execution period of reach performance C and reach performance D.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-9 (J), the super reach κ fluctuation pattern (PA2-11, PB1-9) is used as reach effect C or reach effect D for super reach during variable display. , and from the middle of reach performance C or reach performance D, perform a preliminary performance and a precursor performance instead of reach performance C or reach performance D, and further develop a high expectation reach performance whose execution period is L7. This is a variation pattern in which a notification effect is executed and a reach effect I is executed. Further, the super reach κ variation pattern is also a variation pattern that allows execution of a branch destination suggestion performance during the execution period of the reach performance C and the reach performance D. In addition, in the super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of variable display results) is the same as the high expectation level in the super reach η fluctuation pattern. It is set to L13 (L13>L12>L11), which is longer than L12, which is the length of the period from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance development notification performance to the end timing of the ready-to-win performance F.

The super reach λ fluctuation pattern (PA2-12, PB1-10) is a highly expected reach performance development whose execution period length is L7 from a timing earlier than the reach in other super reach fluctuation patterns during variable display. This is a variation pattern in which a notification effect is executed and a reach effect I is executed. In addition, with the super reach λ fluctuation pattern, the meter effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (from the timing before the reach to the high expectation level reach effect development notification effect). Since the performance is executed, the length of the meter performance executable period is also a variation pattern of L4'': L4>L4'>L4'', which is even shorter than L4'. In addition, in the super reach λ variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of reach performance I (variable display result notification timing) is L13 (L13 >L12>L11).

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 11-10(A) and 11-10(B), the high expectation reach performance development notification performance in this feature section 029SG is by darkening the display area of the image display device 5. A blackout effect that makes it difficult to see the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, a pre-stage effect that displays the previous lines on the image display device 5 after the black-out effect, and a switching effect after the first-stage effect. , after the switching effect, displaying the last lines on the image display device 5; and after the subsequent effect, move the movable body 32 from the origin position above the image display device 5 to the front side of the display area of the image display device 5. A movable body performance is performed in which the movable body is caused to fall (move) to a performance position that overlaps the approximately central position.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10(B) and 11-55, the first stage performance displays the content of the lines spoken by the character displayed on the image display device 5 in the display area of the image display device 5 as a character image 029SG007. This is also an effect that is output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10(B) and 11-55, the second-stage production displays, following the first-stage production, the content of the lines spoken by the character as a character image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5, This is an effect that is output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figure 11-10 (B), the line in the first part is ``I'm not alone...I'll show you everyone's power!'' and the line in the second part is ``Miracle Attack!''

More specifically, the first stage performance consists of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the line "You are not alone..." is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and In the display area of the image display device 5, the seven characters "You are not alone..." are displayed. Then, in the second period, the line "I'll show you everyone's power!" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the line "I'll show you everyone's power!" is output in the display area of the image display device 5. The text appears below the text "You're not alone...". Further, the latter stage effect is also composed of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the lines of "Miracle" are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and are also displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The four characters of the word "miracle" are displayed. In the second period, the words "Attack!" are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the five letters "Attack!" are displayed below the word "Miracle" in the display area of the image display device 5. Is displayed.

In other words, in the first stage performance and the second stage performance in this feature part 029SG, the number of characters displayed in the first period of the first stage performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first period of the second stage performance, and The number of characters displayed in the second period is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second period of the subsequent stage effect.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-10 (B), the manner in which the lines are displayed in the first stage performance is different from the manner in which the lines are displayed in the second stage performance. It is arranged to be displayed in a display mode with a higher degree of emphasis than the mode.

For example, in the first stage effect, the background screen and character image of the image display device 5 are displayed in a dark manner, and the character image 029SG007 consisting of multiple characters (for example, "You are not alone...") is gradually changed in the first period. The character image 029SG007, which is displayed in a manner that becomes larger and brighter (fade-in), and then consists of multiple characters (for example, "I'll show you everyone's power!"), gradually becomes larger and brighter in the second period. It is displayed in a fade-in manner. In addition, after the character image 029SG007 (for example, "I'm not alone...I'll show you everyone's strength!") is displayed the largest and brightest, it is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes smaller and darker (fade out). and eventually disappear. Note that the character image 029SG007 may be moved while fading in or out.

On the other hand, in the second stage effect, the background screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a brighter manner than in the first stage effect, and a plurality of character images 029SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "mi", "ra", "ku", "ru") are displayed. ) is displayed (dynamic display) in a manner that rotates and moves sequentially from the right side of the display screen toward the center in the first period (frame-in), and displays multiple character images 029SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "A", "T", "T", "K", "!") are displayed (frame-in) as if they were rotating from the bottom of the display screen toward the center in the second period (dynamic display). be done. In addition, after these character images 029SG008 (for example, "Miracle Attack!") are displayed the largest and brightest, they move in a radial manner toward the surroundings, and then finally disappear outside the display screen. It is displayed in a frame-out mode.

As shown in Figure 11-10(B), the character image 029SG007 in the first stage effect is small, flat (two-dimensional), moves slowly (speed of change in display mode due to fade-in), and is displayed with low brightness. . On the other hand, the character image 029SG008 in the second stage rendering is larger, three-dimensional (three-dimensional), faster in movement (speed of change in display mode (moving speed) due to frame-in), and higher in brightness than the character image 029SG007 in the first stage rendering. (See Figure 11-55).

In addition, if the maximum size and brightness of character image 029SG008 in the later stage performance are larger and brighter than the maximum size and brightness of character image 029SG007 in the front stage stage effect, then the character image at the time of fade-in or frame-in The size and brightness of a portion of the image may have an inverse relationship. Furthermore, although the contents of the lines are different between the first stage performance and the second stage performance, at least some of the contents may be the same.

In this way, the degree of emphasis is higher when the size of the character image that makes up the serif is larger than when it is small, the degree of emphasis is higher when the shape is three-dimensional than the one that is two-dimensional, and the degree is emphasized when the character image is fast rather than slow. It can be said that the degree of emphasis is higher when the brightness is higher than when the brightness is low. In addition, although the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image have been exemplified in the latter stage rendering with a higher degree of emphasis than the earlier stage rendering, the present invention is not limited to this, and the latter stage rendering It is sufficient that the degree of emphasis of at least one of the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image is higher than that of the character image of the preceding stage effect. In addition to the above, for example, the degree of emphasis includes, for example, for the thickness of characters, thicker ones are higher than thin ones, and for colors, higher saturation and brightness are higher than lower ones. Good too. Furthermore, in addition to the display mode of the character image itself, the degree of emphasis may be increased by displaying a special image such as an effect image around the character image.

FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 029SG. In this feature section 029SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-6, if the variable display result is a jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table. (Normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (Super reach α jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Super reach β jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach γ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-5 (Super reach ζ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-6 (Super reach η jackpot variation pattern), PB1-7 (Super reach θ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-8 (Super reach ι jackpot variation pattern), PB1 -9 (super reach κ jackpot variation pattern) and PB1-10 (super reach λ jackpot variation pattern).

In addition, when determining the fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, set the determination ratio of PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the lowest, and set the determination ratio of PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the lowest. , PB1-3 (Super reach β jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach γ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-5 (Super reach ζ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-6 (Super reach η jackpot variation) pattern), PB1-7 (Super reach θ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-8 (Super reach ι jackpot variation pattern), PB1-9 (Super reach κ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-10 (Super reach λ jackpot variation pattern) (variation pattern)) (Decision ratio of each super reach variation pattern when selecting jackpot variation pattern determination table: PB1-2<PB1-3<PB1-4<PB1-5< PB1-6<PB1-7<PB1-8<PB1-9<PB1-10).

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to, and provides a plurality of jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables with different determination ratios among PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3, and at least two or more jackpot fluctuation patterns have different determination ratios. A plurality of jackpot variation pattern determination tables may be provided, and the variation pattern may be determined using different jackpot variation pattern determination tables depending on the jackpot type. By doing this, it is possible to create a variable pattern that is easily determined for each jackpot type, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to which variable display of the variable pattern the variable display result is a jackpot, You can improve your interest in gaming.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α variation pattern), PA2 -3 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach β), PA2-4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ), PA2-5 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach δ), PA2-6 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach ε) , PA2-7 (variation pattern of super reach ζ deviation), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η deviation), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ deviation), PA2-10 (variation pattern of super reach ι deviation) pattern), PA2-11 (a variation pattern in which super reach κ is off), and PA2-12 (a variation pattern in which super reach λ is off).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table B, change the variation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out), PA2-2 (variation pattern with out of super reach α), PA2 -3 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach β), PA2-4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ), PA2-5 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach δ), PA2-6 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach ε) , PA2-7 (variation pattern of super reach ζ deviation), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η deviation), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ deviation), PA2-10 (variation pattern of super reach ι deviation) pattern), PA2-11 (a variation pattern in which super reach κ is off), and PA2-12 (a variation pattern in which super reach λ is off).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern determination table C for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out), PA2-2 (variation pattern with out of super reach α), PA2 -3 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach β), PA2-4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ), PA2-5 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach δ), PA2-6 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach ε) , PA2-7 (variation pattern of super reach ζ deviation), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η deviation), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ deviation), PA2-10 (variation pattern of super reach ι deviation) pattern), PA2-11 (a variation pattern in which super reach κ is off), and PA2-12 (a variation pattern in which super reach λ is off).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach β deviation pattern), PA2 -4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ), PA2-5 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach δ), PA2-6 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach ε), PA2-7 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach ζ) , PA2-8 (variation pattern of deviation in super reach η), PA2-9 (variation pattern of deviation in super reach θ), PA2-10 (variation pattern of deviation in super reach ι), PA2-11 (variation pattern of deviation in super reach κ) pattern) and PA2-12 (variation pattern with super reach λ deviation).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature section 029SG is "off", the special figure is Since the rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, when determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for a loss, the fluctuation pattern for a non-reach loss (PA1-1 for the fluctuation pattern determination table for a loss, PA1-1 for the fluctuation pattern determination table for a loss; If so, set the highest determination ratio for PA1-2, PA1-3 if the fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss is PA1-4, PA1-4 if the fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss is the highest, and set the determination ratio of PA2-1 (normal reach is ), PA2-2 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach α), PA2-3 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach β), PA2-4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ), PA2-5 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ) δ deviation pattern), PA2-6 (super reach ε deviation pattern), PA2-7 (super reach ζ deviation pattern), PA2-8 (super reach η deviation pattern), PA2-9 ( PA2-10 (variation pattern of super reach θ deviation), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation), PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation) It is only necessary to set the ratio to be lower (determination ratio of each super reach fluctuation pattern when selecting the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table: PA2-12<PA2-11<PA2-10<PA2-9<PA2-8<PA2-7 <PA2-6<PA2-5<PA2-4<PA2-3<PA2-2).

By setting the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern in each fluctuation pattern determination table as described above, for the super reach fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the super reach α fluctuation pattern is set to be the lowest, and the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set to the lowest. The jackpot expectation of the pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach ζ variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach γ variation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach η variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach ζ variation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach θ variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach η variation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach ι variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach θ variation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach κ variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach ι variation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach λ variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach κ variation pattern. The expected jackpot is set higher than the expected jackpot. As for the super reach δ variation pattern and the super reach ε variation pattern, as described above, only the variation patterns in the case where the variable display result is wrong are provided, so the jackpot expectation level is 0.

Next, the image display device 5 in this feature section 029SG will be explained. In the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Furthermore, a first pending storage display area 029SG005D and a second pending storage display area 029SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first pending memory display area 029SG005D and the second pending memory display area 029SG005U, a pending memory display that specifiably displays the variable display pending memory number (special figure pending memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is displayed. . In this feature section 029SG, these pending displays can be displayed in multiple display modes, and depending on which display mode the pending memory display is displayed, a jackpot can be won in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display. It is possible to execute a look-ahead preview performance (also referred to as a pending display preview performance) that changes the rate of control in the gaming state (jackpot expectation level).

Furthermore, on the right side of the image display device 5 in the feature section 029SG, a meter 029SG005M is displayed that can change the display mode to five stages (six stages if the state of not performing the meter performance) is included as the aforementioned meter performance. .

The RAM 102 in this feature section 029SG includes a game control data holding area 029SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 029SG150 shown in FIG. 11-12 includes a first special symbol reservation storage section 029SG151A, a second special symbol reservation storage section 029SG151B, a regular symbol reservation storage section 029SG151C, and a game control flag setting section 029SG152. , a game control timer setting section 029SG153, a game control counter setting section 029SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 029SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 029SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 029SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage part 029SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 029SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 029SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 029SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 029SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 029SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 029SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 has an area for holding various data used to control production operations, such as data storage for production control as shown in FIG. 11-13(A). Area 029SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 029SG190 shown in FIG. 11-13(A) includes a production control flag setting section 029SG191, a production control timer setting section 029SG192, a production control counter setting section 029SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 029SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 029SG191 has multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 029SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 029SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 029SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 029SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 029SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 029SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 029SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 029SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 029SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-13(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 029SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 029SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 029SG194A of this feature section 029SG, the display pattern associated with the determination of whether or not to execute the pre-read notice performance in the pre-read notice setting process (FIG. 11-20) has not yet been determined. In other words, with the occurrence of a new starting prize, a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and pending storage display. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that the flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage.

In addition, in the case where execution of the pre-read notice performance is not determined in the pre-read notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, a white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, and When it is decided to execute the reading preview effect, "1" (blue ○ ) or "2" (red circle) is set, a special mode of pending memory display different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first pending memory display area 029SG5D and the second pending memory display area 029SG5U. , in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the production control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning receiving command buffer 029SG194A. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 029SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the endings "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 11-13(B), when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the first special symbol holding memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination process of the feature section 029SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 6 will be explained based on FIGS. 11-14. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 029SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 029SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 029SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 029SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 029SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 029SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 029SGS101a (step 029SGS101a; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value at step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 029SGS101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 029SGS101b; Y), the number of second special figure pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 029SGS105). For example, the CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 029SG154. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 029SGS105 (step 029SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 029SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 029SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of Step 029SGS103 and Step 029SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (Step 029SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 029SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 029SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 029SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (Step 029SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage section according to the starting opening buffer value (step 029SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 029SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 029SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 029SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 029SGS110, transmission settings of a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (step 029SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 029SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 029SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for this purpose (Step 029SGS113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 029SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS115), and then the process of step 029SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 029SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 11-15(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 029SGS112 of FIG. 11-14 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 029SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 6, FIGS. A determination is made as to whether or not to treat the result) as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 6, FIGS. 11-17) to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 029SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 11-15(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section 029SG152, etc. The current gaming state in machine 1 is specified (step 029SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 029SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-3 is selected and set (step 029SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 029SGS109 of FIG. 11-14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 029SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 029SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not there is a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 029SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be no jackpot in the variable display (step 029SGS123; N), that is, the variable display result will be a "miss" in the variable display. In this case, the transmission settings of the first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss", are executed (step 029SGS128), and the time saving flag is checked to see if it is in the on state, that is. , it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state (step 029SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 029SGS129; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 029SGS129; Y), determine the fluctuation pattern for failure. Select and set table D (step 029SGS131). The error variation pattern determination table A is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the losing variation pattern determination table D is a losing variation pattern determining table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition, if it is determined in step 029SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 029SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 029SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. Execute the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 029SGS133), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot (step 029SGS135), and step Proceed to 029SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS130, step 029SGS131, and step 029SGS135, using each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 029SGS138). In this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-15(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of retained memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is sufficient if it can be determined based on the random value MR3 whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 029SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 029SGS139), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 029SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 029SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section 029SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" at step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 029SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 029 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the second special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 029SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 029SGS144), the process moves to step 029SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 029SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 029SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 reads the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Bye. In this way, the process of step 029SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 029SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" at step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145;N), reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 029SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 029 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 029SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 029SGS148), the process moves to step 029SGS149.

In step 029SGS149, the special symbol display result judgment shown in FIG. Select and set the table. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result should be a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 029 SGS 150a). In addition, in this step 029SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is on, the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is set to a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off and the probability is low, if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not, it will be judged as a "miss". judge.

In this way, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 029SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming status at that time (high accuracy, low accuracy). , In the process of step 029 SGS150a, the special figure display result is determined using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether the gaming state when variable display such as a special figure game is started is a high certainty state or not. By determining whether or not to be considered a "jackpot", when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is judged (determined) as a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 029SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section 029SG152 (step 029SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 029SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches "A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C", it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is selected (step 029 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 029SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Whether to control or not is determined before the fixed special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the gaming control buffer setting section 029SG155 (step 029SGS155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "1", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

After the completion of step 029SGS155, or if it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is not a "jackpot" (step 029SGS150a; N), it is determined whether to control the jackpot gaming state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on or not). A fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of (2) and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" in step 029SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 029SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 029SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 029SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of reserved memories of the special pattern game using the first special pattern is "0" in step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 029SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

FIG. 11-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161; Y), a jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 029SGS164).

In the determination at step 029SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 029SGS161; N), the gaming state is changed by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section. It is determined whether or not time saving control is being performed in which time saving control is performed in the state or time saving state (step 029 SGS168). If the time saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS168; Y), the failure variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns ( Step 029SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time saving flag is not turned on (step 029SGS168; N), for example, the pending memory number counter for variable special symbols provided in the game control counter setting section 029SG154 is stored. By reading the value, etc., the number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is specified, and it is determined whether the specified number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), the variation pattern determination table A for failure is used as a table to be used to determine one of multiple types of variation patterns. Select and set (step 029SGS171).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 029SGS172 ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 029SGS172; Y), select the variation pattern determination table B for failure as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern as one of multiple types. (Step 029SGS173).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is not 3, that is, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is 4 (step 029SGS172; N), select one of the multiple types of variable patterns. As the table to be used for determining the deviation pattern, the error variation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 029SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 029SGS175.

After executing any of the processes in step 029SGS164, step 029SGS169, step 029SGS171, step 029SGS173, and step 029SGS174, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation etc. Based on the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special hit fluctuation pattern determination table, or loss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D, one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns can be selected. (Step 029SGS175).

Incidentally, when the jackpot flag is off, by determining the fluctuation pattern in the process of step 029SGS175, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is to be "reach". That is, the process of step 029SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol should be set to the reach state when the variable display result is "miss".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 029SGS175, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start changing the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 029SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 029SGS176, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol (step 029SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting section sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the 029SG155. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is provided with setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 029SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern is set (step 029SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. It's time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 029SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 029SGS177, each time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. The designation command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command are sent in sequence. It turns out. The order in which these production control commands are sent can be changed arbitrarily, for example, the variable display result specification command is sent first, and then the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, and the variable pattern are sent. The designation command, the game state designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S112 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 029SGS180). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control is performed to send a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (step 029SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182; Y) and the probability change flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and time saving flag and turns them off (step 029SGS184). , hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), win start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), win start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), depending on the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. Settings are made to transmit the winning start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) (step 029 SGS185).

Furthermore, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 029SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 029SGS187). Also, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or a variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. (Step 029SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 029SGS189), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 029SGS182; N), in step 029SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0". If the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 029SGS190; Y), the process advances to step 029SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 029SGS190; N), that is, if the time saving number is in a high base state where the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is -1 (step 029SGS190;N). 029SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 029SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 029SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (step 029SGS193; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 029SGS194), and then the time-saving flag corresponding to the state of the probability change flag or the time-saving flag is After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (specifically, the low probability/low base state) (step 029SGS195), the process advances to step 029SGS196.

In step 029SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

FIG. 11-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (step 029SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 029SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. is set (step 029SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 029SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 029SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 029SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probable variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; N), the probability variable flag is turned on (step 029SGS207), the time saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS208), and the time saving number counter is set to "0". After setting (step 029SGS209), the process advances to step 029SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; Y), by executing step 029SGS211 and step 029SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving number counter is set to "100". After that, the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

In step 029SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 029SGS214). After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command to notify the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 029SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is set to It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 029SGS216).

Next, the operation of the production control board 12 will be explained. FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 6 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-20, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS241), and determines whether there is a new storage of the starting winning command. is determined based on whether there is an entry for which the value of the pending display flag is not set (step 029 SGS242).

If there is no entry with the value of the pending display flag set (Step 029SGS242; N), the prefetch notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry without the value of the pending display flag set (Step 029SGS242; Y), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command that indicates a miss (step 029SGS243). If the symbol designation command is other than the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a symbol designation command that indicates a jackpot (Step 029SGS243; N), based on the variable display result being a jackpot, a jackpot (not shown) is detected. By referring to the pre-read preview effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern when executing the pre-read preview effect (step 029SGS245).

In step 029SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21(A). Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-read preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed in a blue circle in the first pending memory display area 029SG5D or the second pending memory display area 029SG5U, When the display pattern (notice type) of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending memory display is displayed as a red circle in the first pending memory display area 029SG5D or the second pending memory display area 029SG5U. Ru.

In step 029SGS245, as shown in FIG. 11-21(A), for example, non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 30%. However, it is sufficient to decide to execute the display pattern β of the pre-read preview effect at a rate of 65%.

Further, in step 029SGS243, if the symbol designation command of the entry for which the value of the pending display flag is not set is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a symbol designation command indicating a loss (step 029SGS243; Y), The fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category designation command of the entry is specified (step 029SGS247). Specifically, if the fluctuation category designation command for the entry is C600H, it is specified that it is a category with a "non-reach" fluctuation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is determined that it is a category of a "super reach" fluctuation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read preview performance extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 029SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 029SGS247, By referring to the missed advance notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when executing the advance notice effect (step 029SGS248).

In step 029SGS248, for example, the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21(B). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21(B), the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) and whether or not to execute a pre-read preview effect are determined depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in the process of step 029SGS247. It's different.

In step 029SGS247, as shown in Figure 11-21(B), for example, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is "non-reach", it is determined at a rate of 95% that the pre-read preview effect will not be executed. , the execution of the display pattern α of the pre-read preview effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the display pattern β of the pre-read preview effect is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is incorrect and the variable category is "Other", the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect with display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Then, the execution of the display pattern β of the pre-read preview performance is determined at a rate of 5%. Then, if the variable display result is wrong and the variable category is "Super Reach", it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview effect at a rate of 65%, and the execution of the pre-read preview effect in display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. , and the execution of the display pattern β of the pre-read preview effect is determined at a rate of 10%.

Due to these settings, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the variable display result has a higher chance of becoming a jackpot than when it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview effect, so it is a target of the pre-read preview effect. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display. Furthermore, when the pre-read preview effect is executed, the variable display result has a higher chance of becoming a jackpot when the pre-read preview effect is executed with the display pattern β than when it is executed with the display pattern α. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to which display pattern will be used to display the pending memory display that is the subject of the pre-read preview effect.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the display pattern and whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect are determined at the same rate regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance and the determination ratio of the display pattern may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. By doing so, the player can control which jackpot type of jackpot game state will be controlled depending on whether or not the look-ahead preview performance is executed and which display pattern the pending memory display is displayed. It is possible to attract attention.

After executing step 029SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether execution of the pre-read preview performance has been determined in step 029SGS247, that is, whether the display pattern (notice type) has been determined to be either display pattern α or display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 029SGS249).

After executing step 029SGS245 or when it is decided to execute a pre-read preview effect (step 029SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 029SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern α that shows the pending storage display as a blue circle, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern β that shows the pending storage display as a red circle, set the pending display flag of the entry to "2", and then proceed to step 029SGS252. .

In addition, in step 029SGS249, if it is not decided to execute the advance notice effect (step 029SGS249; N), the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating a white circle (step 029SGS250 ), proceed to step 029SGS252.

In addition, after executing step 029SGS246 or step 029SGS250, the performance control CPU 120 updates the pending display based on the stored contents of the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to "0", "1", or "2" set in the pending display flag. Ru.

FIG. 11-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 10 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-22, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is in the on state (step 029SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 029SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol pending memory in the reception command buffer 029SG194A at the time of start winning are set. Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 029SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0". Then, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

Further, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 029SGS271 (step 029SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 029SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273; Y), The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A are stored for one buffer number each. Shift to the upper position (step 029SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 029SGS272 or step 029SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads out the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 029SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 029SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as the stop symbols "7". ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot B, or if it is the fourth variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbol , and a plurality of combinations of odd number symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a decoration with three irregular symbols as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of symbols (missing symbols). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a reach fluctuation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but in the middle. Determine the combination of out-of-reach (out-of-reach symbols) with different symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a meter performance determination process that determines whether or not to perform a meter performance and the performance pattern (step 029SGS277), and determines whether the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the super reach fluctuation pattern. Determination is made (step 029SGS278). It should be noted that whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern may be determined based on whether the variation pattern designation command read in the process of step 029SGS275 is a super reach variation pattern.

If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; N), proceed to step 029SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; Y). further determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS280).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS280; N), the variable display It is determined whether the displayed variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029SGS281). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029SGS281; Y), execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process that determines whether or not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance. Then, the process proceeds to step 029SGS283 (step 029SGS282), and if the variation pattern of the variable display is one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS281; N), The process proceeds to step 029SGS283 without executing the ready-to-reach performance E development notification performance determination process.

In addition, in the process of step 029SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and proceeds to step 029SGS289.

Then, in step 029SGS280, if the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS280; Y), branch A branch destination suggestion effect determination process is executed to determine whether or not to perform the destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern (step 029SGS284). Then, it is determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach ε or super reach θ (step 029SGS285).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of super reach γ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS285; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS289, and the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach ε or super reach κ. If it is a variation pattern of super reach θ (step 029SGS285; Y), a reach effect G development suggestion performance determination process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a reach effect G development suggestion performance (step 029SGS286). Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines the super reach performance to be executed during the variable display from the reach performance C and the reach performance D according to the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS287), and A process table corresponding to the reach performance and variation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 029SGS289 (step 029SGS288).

In the process of step 029SGS287, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. Execution is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach θ (PB1-7), the execution of the ready-to-reach effect C is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of the ready-to-reach effect D is determined at a rate of 70%. Furthermore, if the variation pattern is the super reach ι (PB1-8), execution of the ready-to-reach effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the ready-to-reach effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. Further, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach κ (PB1-9), the execution of reach effect C is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in Figure 11-30 (B), if the variation pattern is super reach γ (PA2-4), the execution of reach effect C is changed to 90. %, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 10%. Furthermore, if the variation pattern is super reach ε (PA2-6), execution of reach effect C is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, if the variation pattern is a super reach effect θ (PA2-9), execution of reach effect C is determined at a rate of 70%, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 30%. Furthermore, if the variation pattern is the super reach ι (PA2-10), the execution of the ready-to-reach effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the ready-to-reach effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. Further, if the variation pattern is a super reach effect κ (PA2-11), execution of reach effect C is determined at a rate of 60%, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 40%.

As shown in Figures 11-30(A) and 11-30(B), reach effect C and reach effect D are executed according to the variation pattern when the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss. By determining different ratios, as shown in FIG. 11-30(C), the overall jackpot expectation level is set higher for reach effect D than for reach effect C.

In addition, regardless of the variable display result, if the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach ι (variation pattern in which reach effect H development notification effect and reach effect H are executed after execution of advance effect and precursor effect) , execution of reach effect D is always determined. On the other hand, when the variable display is executed in the super reach κ variation pattern (the variation pattern in which the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed after the preliminary performance and the precursor performance are executed), the reach There are cases where the effect C is executed and cases where the reach effect D is executed.

In other words, in this feature section 029SG, for the variation patterns (the variation patterns of super reach ι and the variation patterns of super reach κ) in which the preliminary performance and precursor performance are executed during variable display, this feature is applied after the preliminary performance and precursor performance are executed. In section 029, the rate at which the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed (the rate at which the reach performance I with the highest expectation of jackpot is executed) is higher than the reach performance D when execution of the reach performance C is determined. is set higher than when execution is decided. Therefore, in this feature section 029SG, even if reach effect C, which has a lower jackpot expectation level than reach effect D, is executed during variable display, the preliminary effect and the precursor effect are executed after the reach effect C. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the jackpot will be hit, the player will recognize that the level of expectation for a jackpot is low at the time when the reach effect C is executed, and the interest in the game will decrease while the reach effect C is executed. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Furthermore, the variation pattern of super reach θ in which the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result is once notified as reach effect C or reach effect D, and the variation pattern of super reach θ during execution of reach effect C or reach effect D. Comparing the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ when advance performance, precursor performance, and high-expectation reach performance development notification performance are executed in place of reach performance C and reach performance D, as shown in Figure 11-30 (D). In addition, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the determination ratio of reach performance C and the determination ratio of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference between the determination ratio of reach performance C and reach performance D in the variation pattern of super reach θ is 40%. The difference between the determination ratio of reach performance C and the determination ratio of reach performance D in the variable pattern is set to 60%. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-30 (E), in the case where the variable display result is off, the difference between the determination ratio of reach effect C and the determination ratio of reach effect D in the variation pattern of super reach θ is 40 %, whereas the difference between the determination ratio of reach performance C and the determination ratio of reach performance D in the variation pattern of super reach κ is set to 20%.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ and the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ will depend on which of the reach effects C and D is executed. Whether the variable display is a variable display of super reach κ in which advance performance, precursor performance, and high-expectation reach performance notification performance are executed during reach performance C or reach performance D, or as reach performance C or reach performance D. Once the variable display result (missing) is announced, it is possible to infer whether the variable display is super reach θ, in which reach performance G development notification performance is executed, so it is possible to guess whether the variable display is super reach θ, which is executed after the variable display result (missing) is announced, so the difference between reach performance C and reach performance D This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to which one is being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 11-22, in step 029SGS289, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a chance-up performance has been executed, which indicates that the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) has increased during the variable display, and the corresponding chance. A chance-up performance determining process for determining a performance pattern for the up performance is executed (step 029SGS289).

The performance control CPU 120 that executed the chance up performance determination process next starts a process timer corresponding to the process timer selected in the process of step 029SGS283 or step 029SGS288 (step 029SGS290).

In addition, each process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). ing.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 213SGS288). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 (step 029SGS290).

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 029SGS292). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 029SGS293). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is ended (step 213SGS291).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 increments the value of the process timer by -1 every time the variable display performance process is executed, and determines whether the value of the process timer has timed out. do. If the process timer has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next What is necessary is to start the process timer and control the presentation device according to the contents of the next process data. By doing so, the variable display of the decorative pattern in the main feature section 029SG is executed.

FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS277 of FIG. 11-22 as the meter effect determination process. In the meter performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, or super reach κ. It is determined whether it is a fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS301). If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS301; Y), the meter effect determination process is ended, If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the following fluctuation patterns: non-reach, shortened non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS301;N) determines whether the variable display variation pattern is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 029SGS302).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 029SGS302; Y), the meter effect determination process is terminated, and the variation pattern of the variable display is non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β. , super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS302; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the meter performance according to the fluctuation pattern. A performance pattern is determined (Step 029SGS303).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (no shortening, non-reach), non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 90%, Execution of meter performance pattern A is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of meter performance pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of meter performance pattern C is determined at a rate of 0%. , determines the execution of meter performance pattern D at a rate of 0%, determines the execution of meter performance pattern E at a rate of 0%, and determines the execution of meter performance pattern F at a rate of 0%. do. In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern, the non-execution of meter effects is determined at a rate of 20%, the execution of meter effects pattern A is determined at a rate of 25%, and the execution of meter effects pattern B is determined at a rate of 25%. The execution of meter performance pattern C is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution of meter performance pattern C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of meter performance pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of pattern F of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is one of Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, and Super Reach ζ, the non-execution of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 10%, and the meter performance pattern A The execution of meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution of meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 15%, the execution of meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 40%. The execution of pattern D is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution of pattern E of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of pattern F of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the variation pattern is a super reach η variation pattern, non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 5%. The execution of pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern C of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern D of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of pattern E is determined at a rate of 95%, and the execution of pattern F of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach λ fluctuation pattern, non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of pattern A of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern C of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern D of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of pattern F of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 100%.

As shown in Figures 11-24 (B) and 11-25, pattern A in the meter effect is the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (if it is a non-reach variable pattern without shortening, it is the period from the start of the variable display to the reach). This is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing during the variable display result notification period), and pattern B is a production pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step during the first timing and the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (non-reach variation without shortening). If it is a pattern, it is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step (total increase of two steps) at the second timing after the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the notification of the variable display result. , pattern C is the first timing, the second timing, and the period from reach to the start of the reach effect of super reach (for the variable pattern of normal reach, the period from reach to variable display result notification). This is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at three timings (increases by three steps in total).

In addition, in pattern D, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing, second timing, third timing, and fourth timing when reach effect A or reach effect B is being executed (total increase of four steps). ) is a performance pattern. In addition, pattern E includes the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, the fourth timing, and the fifth timing (high expectation reach effect start/stop) which is during execution of reach effect A and is later than the fourth timing. This is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step (a total of five steps) at a timing before the start timing of the notification effect. Pattern F is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by five steps at the second timing.

Returning to FIG. 11-23, after executing the process of 029SGS303, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the meter effect (step 029SGS304). If the execution of the meter effect has not been decided (Step 029SGS304; N), the meter effect determination process is ended, and if the execution of the meter effect has been decided (Step 029SGS304; Y), the effect pattern of the determined meter effect is memorized. (Step 029SGS305), sets a meter performance start wait timer according to the fluctuation pattern, and ends the meter performance determination process (Step 029SGS306).

In addition, when the execution of the meter effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts the value of the meter effect start wait timer by 1 every time the variable display effect processing is executed, and the value of the meter effect start wait timer is set to 1. Determine whether or not it is out. At this time, if the meter performance start waiting timer times out, a process table for meter performance corresponding to the determined performance pattern of meter performance is selected, and the process timer for meter performance is started. Thereafter, the value of the meter performance process timer is incremented by 1 every time the variable display performance process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the meter performance process timer has timed out. If the process timer for meter performance has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer for meter performance, and if the process timer for meter performance has timed out, the process data and start the next process data. By doing so, it is possible to perform meter effects during variable display.

As described above, in this feature part 029SG, by executing the meter effect during variable display, it is possible to check whether the meter 029SG005M increases to 5 levels, and by increasing the meter 029SG005M to 5 levels, the high expected level of reach is determined. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the performance development performance will be executed.

FIG. 11-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS282 of FIG. 11-22 as the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process. In the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS311). . For example, as shown in FIG. 11-26(B), if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ, it is determined that the reach performance E development suggestion performance is not executed at a rate of 50%, Determine the execution of reach performance E development suggestion performance at a rate of 50%. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ, it is determined that the reach performance E development suggestion performance is not executed at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the reach performance E development suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 80%. Determined by the ratio of

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance in the process of step 029SGS311 (step 029SGS312). If it has not been decided to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance (step 029SGS312; N), the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process is ended, and if it has been decided to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance (step 029SGS312 ;Y) sets the ready-to-win performance E development suggestion performance start wait timer and ends the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process (step 029SGS313).

In addition, if the execution of the reach performance E development suggestion performance has been decided, the performance control CPU 120 reduces the value of the wait time for the start of the reach performance E development suggestion performance by 1 every time the performance processing during variable display is executed, and It is determined whether the value of the performance E development suggestion performance start wait timer has timed out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance has timed out, the process table for the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance is selected, and the process timer for the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance is started. From then on, each time the variable display processing is executed, the value of the process timer for reach performance E development suggestion performance is decremented by -1, and it is determined whether the process timer for reach performance E development suggestion performance has timed out. . If the process timer for reach performance E development suggestion performance has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer for reach performance E development suggestion performance, and the reach performance E development suggestion performance is executed. If the process timer times out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed during variable display.

In particular, in this feature section 029SG, the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach ζ in which the reach effect E development notification effect is executed is better than the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach δ in which the reach effect E development notification effect is not executed. Since the reach performance E development suggestion performance is executed at a higher rate when the reach performance It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

FIG. 11-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS284 of FIG. 11-22 as the branch destination suggestion effect determination process. In the branch destination suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS321). .

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-28 (A), if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ, non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 90%. , determine the execution of branch destination suggestion performance in pattern Determine at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach ε, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%. The execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a super reach θ fluctuation pattern, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%. The execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 15%, and the execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ι, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in pattern X is determined at a rate of 10%. The execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%. The execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 40%.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (B), the pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is such that the image display device 5 executes the reach effect H development notification effect during the execution period of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. This is a performance pattern that displays a branch destination suggestion image This is a performance pattern that displays a branch destination suggestion image Y that suggests the execution of the reach performance H development notification performance during the execution period of . This is a performance pattern that displays a branch destination suggestion image Z that suggests execution of a highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance during the execution period of D.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, among patterns X to pattern Z, pattern Z is determined to be executed at a higher rate than pattern In other words, pattern Z is a performance pattern that has a higher degree of expectation for execution of the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance than pattern X and pattern Y (execution expectation of high expectation reach performance development notification performance: pattern Z > pattern Y , pattern Z > pattern X). Furthermore, when the reach effect H development notification effect is executed, pattern Y is determined to be executed at a higher rate than pattern X or pattern X. In other words, pattern Y is more likely to be executed than pattern This is a performance pattern in which the execution expectation level of the development notification performance is high (reach performance H execution expectation level of the development notification performance: pattern Y>pattern Z, pattern Y>pattern X).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-28 (A), the execution or non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern are determined at different rates depending on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and are determined according to the result of the variable display. The proportions are not different. In other words, the performance pattern and the presence or absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect depend on whether or not the reach effect G to reach effect I develops after reach effect C or reach effect D is executed, and whether or not the reach effect G to reach effect I will develop after reach effect C or reach effect D is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion performance and the performance pattern are determined depending on which direction the variable display will develop. The determination ratio may be different depending on both the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result, or the determination ratio may be different depending only on the variable display result.

Returning to FIG. 11-27, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether execution of the branch destination suggestion performance has been determined in the process of step 029SGS321 (step 029SGS232). If execution of the branch destination suggestion effect has not been decided (Step 029SGS232; N), the branch destination suggestion effect determination process is ended; if execution of the branch destination suggestion effect has been decided (Step 029SGS232; Y), the decided branch The performance pattern of the destination suggestion performance is stored (step 029SGS323), a branch destination suggestion performance start wait timer is set, and the branch destination suggestion performance determination process is ended (step 029SGS324).

In addition, when execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is decided, the effect control CPU 120 decreases the value of the branch destination suggestion effect start wait timer by 1 every time the variable displaying effect process is executed, and starts the branch destination suggestion effect. Determine whether the value of the wait timer has timed out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of a branch destination suggestion performance times out, a process table for branch destination suggestion performance is selected according to the performance pattern of the determined branch destination suggestion performance, and the process timer for branch destination suggestion performance is started. let Thereafter, each time the variable display performance process is executed, the value of the process timer for branch destination suggestion performance is incremented by one, and it is determined whether or not the process timer for branch destination suggestion performance has timed out. If the process timer for branch destination suggestion production has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer for branch destination suggestion production, and the process timer for branch destination suggestion production has timed out. If so, switch the process data and start the next process data. By doing so, it is possible to perform a branch destination suggestion effect during variable display.

In particular, in this characteristic part 029SG, by displaying any of the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, and branch destination suggestion image Z on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D, , it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the fact that the variable display result is not notified as the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D, and the change is made to the preliminary effect. Furthermore, depending on which of the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, and branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D, the preliminary effect is Since the rate at which the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the precursor performance and the rate at which the high-expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed are different, the branch destination suggestion image X and the branch destination are displayed on the image display device 5. The player's attention can be drawn to which of the suggestion image Y and the branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 11-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS286 of FIG. 11-22 as the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process. In the ready-to-win performance G development suggestion performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-29, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the ready-to-reach performance G development suggestion performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (B), if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach ε, the non-execution of reach performance G development suggestion performance is set at a rate of 50%. , and the execution of reach performance G development suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach θ, the non-execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Determined by the ratio of

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the reach performance G development suggestion performance in the process of step 029SGS331 (step 029SGS332). If it has not been decided to execute the reach performance G development suggestion performance (step 029SGS332; N), the reach performance G development suggestion performance determination process is ended, and if it has been decided to execute the reach performance G exhibition suggestion performance (step 029SGS332 ;Y) sets a timer for waiting for the start of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect and ends the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect determination process (step 029SGS333).

In addition, if the execution of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts the value of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect start wait timer by 1 every time the variable displaying effect process is executed, and It is determined whether the value of the production G exhibition suggested production start wait timer has timed out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the ready-to-reach presentation G exhibition suggestion performance has timed out, the process table for the ready-to-reach presentation G exhibition suggestion presentation is selected, and the process timer for the ready-to-reach presentation G exhibition suggestion presentation is started. From then on, each time the variable display processing is executed, the value of the process timer for reach performance G exhibition suggestion performance is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether the process timer for reach performance G exhibition suggestion performance has timed out. . If the reach production G exhibition suggestion production process timer has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the reach production G exhibition suggestion production process timer, and the reach production G exhibition suggestion production is executed. If the process timer times out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect can be executed during variable display.

In particular, in this characteristic part 029SG, the variable display in the super reach θ variation pattern in which the reach effect G notification effect is executed is higher than the variable display in the super reach ε variation pattern in which the reach effect G notification effect is not executed. Since the reach performance E development suggestion performance is executed in proportion, in the variable display with these super reach ε and super reach θ variation patterns, reach performance G development is executed after reach performance C and reach performance D are executed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

FIG. 11-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS289 of FIG. 11-22 as the chance-up effect determination process. In the chance up performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-31, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS340). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS340; Y), the chance up effect determination process is ended, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern, Furthermore, it is determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach λ (step 029SGS341).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach λ variation pattern (step 029SGS341; Y), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is not a super reach λ variation pattern (step 029SGS341; Y), the process ends. 029SGS341;N) further determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, or super reach κ (step 029SGS342).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS342; N), the variable display It is determined whether the displayed variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach α or super reach η (step 029SGS343). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach α or super reach η fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS343; Y), the performance control CPU 120 controls the execution of the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance A according to the variable display result. The presence/absence and effect pattern are determined (step 029SGS344).

Here, the contents of the ready-to-reach presentation A to the ready-to-reach presentation I in this feature section 029SG will be explained based on FIGS. 11-32(A) to 11-32(E). As shown in FIG. 11-32 (A) to FIG. 11-32 (I), each of reach effect A to reach effect I includes a reach title display period in which the title of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5; It consists of a subsequent battle performance execution period in which the image display device 5 displays a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character.

During the reach title display period of each of these reach effects A to I, the reach titles can be displayed in red as part of the chance-up effect (see FIG. 11-33(A)).

In addition, regarding the battle performance execution period of reach performance A to reach performance D, the cut-in image can be displayed on the image display device 5 during the movable body operation period during which the movable body 32 can be operated in the first half of the battle performance execution period. A cut-in image displayable period is provided, and as part of the chance-up effect, the operation of the movable body 32 during the movable body operation possible period and the display of the cut-in image during the cut-in image displayable period can be executed. (See Figure 11-33(A)).

In addition, regarding the battle performance execution period of reach performance C and reach performance D, a branch destination suggestion performance execution possible period is provided after these movable body movement possible period and cut-in image display possible period.

In addition, regarding the battle execution period of reach effect E and reach effect F, the first half of the battle effect execution period is provided with a movable body movement period, and the second half of the battle effect execution period (the end of the battle effect (near the timing), an operation is performed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A in order to notify the variable display result in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A on the image display device 5. An operation promotion image display period for displaying a promotion image is provided. Note that the operation promotion image display period is normally a period in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed.

In this feature section 029SG, during the battle execution period of reach performance E and reach performance F, the movement of the movable body during the movable body operation period as part of the chance-up performance, and the image of the stick controller 31A during the operation promotion image display period. (See Figure 11-33(B)).

Note that for the reach effect G, the reach effect H, and the reach effect I, a movable body operable period, a cut-in image display period, and an operation promotion image display period are not provided. In other words, reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I are reach performance in which chance-up performance is not executed.

Returning to step 029SGS344 in FIG. 11-31, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (A), if the variable display result is a failure, the performance control CPU 120 will not execute the chance-up performance at a rate of 60%. The execution of the chance-up effect pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, the execution of the chance-up effect pattern Q is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the chance-up effect pattern R is determined at a rate of 0. Determined in percentage. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 5% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 35% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern P, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%. The execution of pattern Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance A (step 029SGS345). If it has not been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345; N), proceed to step 029SGS347, and if it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345; Y). stores the determined performance pattern, sets a chance up performance start timer for reach performance A according to the variation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS347 (step 029SGS346).

In step 029SGS347, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach η (step 029SGS347). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach α variation pattern (step 029SGS347; N), the chance up effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach η variation pattern (step 029SGS347; N), the process ends. 029SGS347; Y) determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during the execution of the reach effect F and the effect pattern according to the variable display result (step 029SGS348).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (B), if the variable display result is a failure, it is decided to not execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 40%, and the pattern S of the chance-up effect is decided. The execution is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution of the pattern T of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the pattern U of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 10% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 20% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern S, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%. The execution of pattern T is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of pattern U of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance F (step 029SGS349). If it has not been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect F is being executed (step 029SGS349; N), the chance-up effect determination process is ended, and if it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect F is being executed. (Step 029SGS349; Y) stores the determined performance pattern, sets a chance up performance start timer for reach performance F according to the variation pattern, and ends the chance up performance determination process (Step 029SGS350).

In addition, in step 029SGS343, if the variation pattern of the variable display is one of super reach β, super reach δ, and super reach ζ (step 029SGS343; N), the production control CPU 120 controls the reach production according to the variable display result. B determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during execution and the effect pattern (step 029SGS351).

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 11-34 (C), if the variable display result is a failure, it is determined that the chance-up effect will not be executed at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect pattern P will be executed. Execution is determined at a rate of 30%, execution at a rate of pattern Q of chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution at a rate of pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 10% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 20% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern P, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%. The execution of pattern Q is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance B (step 029SGS352). If it has not been decided to execute the chance-up effect during reach effect B (step 029SGS352; N), the process advances to step 029SGS354, and if it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect during reach effect B (step 029SGS352; Y). stores the determined performance pattern, sets a chance up performance start timer for reach performance B according to the variation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS354 (step 029SGS353).

In step 029SGS354, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ζ (step 029SGS354). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach δ (step 029SGS354; N), the chance up effect determination process is ended, and the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ζ. If yes (step 029SGS354; Y), the presence or absence of the chance-up effect during execution of the reach effect E and the effect pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS355).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (D), if the variable display result is a failure, it is decided to not execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 60%, and the pattern S of the chance-up effect is decided. The execution is determined at a rate of 35%, the execution of the pattern T of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the pattern U of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 5% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 35% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern S, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%. The execution of pattern T is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of pattern U of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance E (step 029SGS356). If it has not been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed (step 029SGS356; N), the chance-up effect determination process is ended, and if it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed. (Step 029SGS356; Y) stores the determined performance pattern, sets a chance-up performance start timer for reach performance E according to the variation pattern, and ends the chance-up performance determination process (Step 029SGS357).

In addition, in the process of step 029SGS342, if the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS342; Y), the effect The control CPU 120 further determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is either the super reach γ or super reach ε variation pattern (step 029SGS358).

If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is one of the super reach θ, super reach ι, or super reach κ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS358; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is If it is a variation pattern of super reach γ or super reach ε (step 029SGS358; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance up effect during reach effect C or reach effect D, according to the variable display result. A performance pattern is determined (step 029SGS359).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-34 (A), when the reach effect to be executed is reach effect C, if the variable display result is a failure, the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 60%. , the execution of pattern P of chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 35%, the execution of pattern Q of chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 5%, and the execution of pattern R of chance-up effect is decided. Determine at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 5% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 35% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern P, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%. The execution of pattern Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-34 (C), when the reach effect to be executed is reach effect D, if the variable display result is a failure, non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%. Then, the execution of the chance-up effect pattern P is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution of the chance-up effect pattern Q is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the chance-up effect pattern R is determined at a rate of 10%. Determined by the ratio of In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 10% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 20% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern P, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%. The execution of pattern Q is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance C or the reach performance D (step 029SGS360). If it has not been decided to execute the chance up effect during reach effect C or reach effect D (step 029SGS360; N), the chance up effect determination process is ended and the chance up effect during reach effect C or reach effect D is executed. If it is decided to execute (Step 029 SGS360; Y), the determined performance pattern is stored, and a chance up performance start timer for reach performance C or reach performance D is set according to the variation pattern, and the chance up performance determination process is performed. (Step 029SGS361).

In addition, when it has been decided to execute the chance up performance, the performance control CPU 120 decreases the value of the chance up performance start wait timer by 1 every time the variable display performance processing is executed, and sets the value of the chance up performance start wait timer to 1. Determine whether the value has timed out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of chance up performance has timed out, a process table for chance up performance is selected and a process timer for chance up performance is started. Thereafter, each time the variable display performance process is executed, the value of the process timer for chance up performance is incremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the process timer for chance up performance has timed out. If the process timer for chance up effect has not timed out, control the effect device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer for chance up effect, and if the process timer for chance up effect has timed out. , switches the process data, and starts the next process data. By doing so, it is possible to perform a chance-up effect during variable display.

In particular, in this feature section 029SG, the degree of jackpot expectation varies depending on whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the number of times the chance-up effect is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, so whether the chance-up effect is executed or not. In fact, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the number of executions of the chance-up effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in reach performances with relatively low expectations for jackpots, such as reach performances A to D, chance-up performances are performed up to three times, so chance-up performances are performed while reach performances A to D are in progress. It is possible to effectively suggest to the player that the variable display result will be a jackpot depending on the number of executions.

On the other hand, in reach performances with high expectations for jackpots such as reach performance G to reach performance I, the chance-up performance can only be performed once during the reach performance, so it is unnecessary to perform the chance-up performance multiple times. By executing this, it is possible to prevent the performance interest of the reach performance with high expectation of jackpot from decreasing.

As shown in FIG. 11-34(E), among the performance patterns for chance-up effects in reach effect A to reach effect D, pattern P displays the reach title in red, but the movement of the movable body 32 and Pattern Q is a production pattern in which the cut-in image is not displayed, pattern Q is a production pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed, but no cut-in image is displayed, and pattern R is the production pattern in which the cut-in image is not displayed. This is a performance pattern that executes all of the red display, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (F), among the performance patterns for chance-up effects in reach effect E and reach effect F, pattern S displays the reach title in red, but does not match the movement of the movable body 32. Pattern Q is a performance pattern that does not display the image of the stick controller 31A, pattern Q is a performance pattern that displays the reach title in red and executes the movement of the movable body 32, but does not display the image of the stick controller 31A, and pattern R is a performance pattern that does not display the image of the stick controller 31A. This is an effect pattern that executes all of the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A.

As mentioned above, as for the chance-up effect of this feature part 029SG, as shown in Figures 11-34 (A) to 11-34 (D), the chance-up effect as a whole in reach effect A to reach effect D is as follows: When the effect is not executed, the jackpot expectation level is set to be the lowest, and when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern P, the jackpot expectation level is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed. There is. When the chance-up performance is executed with pattern Q, the expectation level of jackpot is set higher than when the chance-up performance is executed with pattern P. When the chance-up effect is executed in pattern R, the expectation level of jackpot is set higher than when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern Q (the jackpot of the chance-up effect in reach effect A to reach effect D). Expectation level: pattern R > pattern Q > pattern P > non-execution).

In addition, as for the overall chance-up effect in reach effect E and reach effect F, the expectation of jackpot is set to be the lowest when the chance-up effect is not executed, and when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern S, The expected level of jackpot is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed. When the chance-up effect is executed in pattern T, the expectation level of jackpot is set higher than when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern S. When the chance-up effect is executed in pattern RU, the jackpot expectation level is set higher than when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern T (the jackpot of the chance-up effect in reach effect E and reach effect F). Expectation level: pattern U > pattern T > pattern S > non-execution).

Here, when comparing the case where reach effect A to reach effect D are executed and the case where reach effect E or reach effect F is executed, pattern P and pattern Q are common in reach effect A to reach effect D. While pattern R is set as an executable effect pattern, pattern R is executable only when reach effect B or reach effect D is executed. In other words, the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 are effects that can be executed in any of the reach effects A to D, while the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed only in the reach effects B and D. This is a performance that can be executed.

Also, when comparing the case where reach effect E is executed and the case where reach effect F is executed, it is found that in reach effect E and reach effect F, pattern S and pattern T are commonly set as executable effect patterns. On the other hand, pattern U can only be executed when reach effect F is executed. In other words, the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 are effects that can be executed in either reach effect E or reach effect F, while the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image is the effect of reach effect F. This is a performance that can only be performed in

Next, the performance mode of variable display of super reach in this feature section 029SG will be explained based on FIGS. 11-35 to 11-56. First, a case where reach effect A is executed as a reach effect of super reach will be explained. Note that the meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as having not increased by one step. As shown in Figures 11-35 (A) to 11-35 (D), the execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (in this feature section 029SG, when execution in pattern D or pattern E is determined) (disclosed), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing before the reach, the second timing, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in FIGS. 11-35 (E) and 11-35 (F), when the reach effect A is started, the title image of the reach effect A and the expectation of jackpot of the reach effect A are first displayed on the image display device 5. An expectation level image 029SG251 indicating the degree is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG161A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect A, while any of Pattern P, Pattern Q, and Pattern R is displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern, title image 029SG161B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect A.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect A is finished, a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (G). As shown in FIG. 11-36 (H), even during the battle performance, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the fourth timing.

In addition, during the battle performance, if the performance pattern of pattern Q or pattern R is determined to execute the chance-up performance, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (I), from the origin position of the movable body 32 A motion toward the production position is executed. The movement of the movable body 32 as a chance-up performance is movement from the origin position toward the performance position, but the movement of the movable body 32 ends at an intermediate position between the origin position and the performance position. Thereafter, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the original position.

Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (J) and 11-36 (K). is displayed.

If the variable display is a variable display of the variation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (L) and 11-36 (M), the battle performance will be As a result, when the ally character A is defeated by the enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a loss, and after the battle performance (reach performance A) is finished, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), as shown in Figures 11-36 (N) and 11-36 (O), the battle performance When the friendly character A wins over the enemy character A as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (ready-to-reach performance A) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display of super reach η, as shown in Figures 11-37 (P) and 11-37 (Q), at the fifth timing after the end of the cut-in image display period. The meter 029SG005M increases by one step (up to 5 steps) and becomes full. Then, at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, a telop image 029SG005T is displayed to notify that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 levels (it is full) and that the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance will be executed. be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (R), the battle performance is interrupted midway, and instead of the battle performance, a high expectation reach performance development notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high expectation reach performance development notification performance. 029SG180 is displayed. Then, reach effect F is started. The details of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance will be described later with reference to FIG. 11-55.

As shown in FIG. 11-37 (S) and FIG. 11-37 (T), when the reach effect F is started, the title image of the reach effect F and the expectation of jackpot of the reach effect A are first displayed on the image display device 5. An expectation level image 029SG256 indicating the degree is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG166A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect F, while any of Pattern S, Pattern T, and Pattern U is displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern, the title image 029SG166B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of the reach effect F.

When the display of the title image of the reach effect F ends, a battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character B starts, as shown in FIG. 11-37(U). During the battle performance, if the performance pattern of pattern T or pattern U is determined to execute the chance-up performance, the movable An operation (movement) of the body 32 from the origin position toward an intermediate position is performed. Thereafter, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the original position.

As the battle performance progresses, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (X), 11-38 (Y), and 11-38 (Z), a message is displayed to the player in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. An operation promotion image is displayed that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B or stick controller 31A. In addition, at this time, if execution of the chance-up performance is not determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as an operation promotion image, while the performance of the chance-up performance is not determined in the performance pattern of pattern U. If execution has been determined, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as an operation promotion image.

After the operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the period for accepting operation of these operation means ends, the battle production is started. A variable display result is notified as a presentation result.

Specifically, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-8) of super reach η, as shown in FIGS. 11-39(a) and 11-39(b), the battle As a result of the performance, when ally character B is defeated by enemy character B, it is announced that the variable display result is a failure, and after the battle performance (reach performance F) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating failure. Ru.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach η jackpot variation pattern (PB1-6), as shown in Figures 11-39(c) and 11-39(d), the battle performance When the friendly character B wins over the enemy character B as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance F) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

Next, a case where reach effect B is executed as a reach effect of super reach will be explained. Note that the meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as having not increased by one step. As shown in Figures 11-40(A) to 11-40(D), the execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (in this feature section 029SG, when execution in pattern D or pattern E is determined) (disclosed), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing before the reach, the second timing, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in FIGS. 11-40(E) and 11-40(F), when reach effect B is started, the title image of the reach effect B and the expectation of jackpot of the reach effect B are first displayed on the image display device 5. An expectation level image 029SG252 indicating the degree is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG162A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect B, while any of Pattern P, Pattern Q, and Pattern R is displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern, title image 029SG162B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect B.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect B ends, a battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (G). As shown in FIG. 11-41(H), even during the battle performance, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the fourth timing.

In addition, during the battle performance, if the performance pattern of pattern Q or pattern R is determined to execute the chance-up performance, as shown in FIG. 11-41(I), from the origin position of the movable body 32 A movement (movement) to an intermediate position is performed. Thereafter, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the original position.

Furthermore, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (J) and 11-41 (K). is displayed.

If the variable display is a variable display of the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), as shown in Figures 11-41 (L) and 11-41 (M), the battle performance will be As a result, when the friendly character B is defeated by the enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a loss, and after the battle performance (reach performance B) is finished, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3), as shown in Figures 11-41 (N) and 11-41 (O), the battle performance When the friendly character B wins over the enemy character A as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (ready-to-reach performance B) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display of super reach δ or super reach ζ, as shown in Figure 11-42 (P) and Figure 11-42 (Q), after the cut-in image display period ends. When the friendly character B is defeated by the enemy character A, it is once announced that the variable display result is a failure.

After the battle effect (reach effect B) is finished, a swinging display is performed in a combination indicating the failure of the decorative symbols. At this time, if it has been decided to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. The reach effect E development suggestion images 029SG170 are displayed so that the display positions overlap.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display of a variation pattern of super reach δ, as shown in FIG. When the machine stops, it is notified again that the variable display is off. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ζ, as shown in Figure 11-42 (T), after the reach effect E development suggestion execution possible period, the reach effect E development notification is displayed. As a performance, a reach performance E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed. Then, reach effect E is started.

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (U) and 11-42 (V), when the reach effect E is started, the title image of the reach effect E is first displayed on the image display device 5, and the expectation of jackpot of the reach effect E is displayed. An expectation level image 029SG255 indicating the degree is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG165A with black title characters will be displayed as the title image of reach effect E, while any of Pattern S, Pattern T, and Pattern U will be displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the effect pattern, title image 029SG165B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect E.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect E ends, a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character B starts, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (W). During the battle performance, if the execution of the chance-up performance is determined by the performance pattern of pattern T or pattern U, as shown in Figures 11-43 (X) and 11-43 (Y), the movement An operation (movement) of the body 32 from the origin position toward an intermediate position is performed. Thereafter, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the original position.

As the battle performance progresses, as shown in FIG. 11-43(Z), FIG. 11-43(a), and FIG. 11-43(b), a message appears to the player in the center of the display area of the image display device An operation promotion image is displayed that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B or stick controller 31A. In addition, at this time, if execution of the chance-up performance is not determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as an operation promotion image, while the performance of the chance-up performance is not determined in the performance pattern of pattern U. If execution has been determined, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as an operation promotion image.

After the operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the period for accepting operation of these operation means ends, the battle production is started. A variable display result is notified as a presentation result.

Specifically, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ (PA2-7), as shown in Figures 11-44(c) and 11-44(d), the battle As a result of the performance, when ally character A is defeated by enemy character B, it is announced that the variable display result is a failure, and after the battle performance (reach performance E) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates failure. Ru.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach ζ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5), as shown in Figures 11-44 (e) and 11-44 (f), the battle performance When the friendly character A wins over the enemy character B as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (ready-to-reach performance E) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

Here, the performance mode of the reach performance E development suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 11-42(Q) to 11-42(T) will be explained in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-45(A) to 11-45(B), when it is decided to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the decorative symbols are displayed oscillatingly in a combination indicating a miss. In this state, as the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestion effect, the first stage of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. In addition, the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 of the first stage has lower visibility from the player, such as lower brightness and fewer display colors than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative symbols. Any image is fine.

After the first stage display period of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 ends, the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is temporarily displayed as shown in FIGS. After finishing the display, the second stage display of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is performed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. The second stage reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 has higher brightness and more display colors than the first stage reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170. It is sufficient if the image is more visible to the player.

When the variable display is a variable display based on a variation pattern of super reach δ, as shown in FIG. 11-45(E), a reach effect E development notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a reach effect E development notification effect. The display of 029SG181 is not executed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display based on a variation pattern of super reach ζ, as shown in FIG. Image 029SG181 is displayed and reach effect E is executed.

Next, a case where reach effect C or reach effect D is executed as a reach effect of super reach will be explained. In addition, when reach effect C or reach effect D is executed as a reach effect of super reach, meter effect is not executed, so explanation of the period from the start of variable display to reach effect will be omitted.

When the reach effect C is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-46(A) to 11-46(C), when the reach effect C is started, the reach effect C is first displayed on the image display device 5. The title image and the expectation level image 029SG253 indicating the jackpot expectation level of the reach effect C are displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG163A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect C, while any of Pattern P, Pattern Q, and Pattern R is displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern, title image 029SG163B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect C.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect C ends, a battle effect between the ally character C and the enemy character A starts, as shown in FIG. 11-46(C).

On the other hand, when the reach effect D is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-46(D) to 11-46(F), when the reach effect D is started, the image display device 5 first A title image of the reach effect D and an expectation level image 029SG254 indicating the jackpot expectation level of the reach effect D are displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG164A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect D, while any of Pattern P, Pattern Q, and Pattern R is displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up performance in the performance pattern, title image 029SG164B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of reach performance D.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect D ends, a battle effect between the ally character D and the enemy character A starts, as shown in FIG. 11-46(F).

In addition, during the battle performance of reach performance C or reach performance D, if the execution of chance up performance is determined by pattern Q or pattern R performance pattern, in Figure 11-47 (G) and Figure 11- As shown in 47(H), the movement (movement) of the movable body 32 from the origin position to the intermediate position is executed. Thereafter, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the original position.

Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-47 (I) and FIG. 11-47 (J). is displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 11-47(K) to 11-47-(M), if execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined, a cut during the battle effect of reach effect C or reach effect D After the in-image display period, a reach performance H development notification performance (reach performance H) is executed on the image display device 5 as a branch destination suggestion performance, and a high expectation reach performance development notification performance (reach performance I) is executed. A branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y) or a branch destination suggestion image Z (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z) that suggests that a highly anticipated reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) is to be executed.

After the branch destination suggestion performance executable period, if the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ, the ), when the reach effect C is executed, the variable display is notified that the ally character C is defeated by the enemy character A as a result of the battle effect, and when the reach effect D is executed. If so, it is reported that the variable display has failed because the friendly character D is defeated by the enemy character A as a result of the battle performance. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4), as shown in Figures 11-48 (Q) to 11-48 (S), the reach effect If C is executed, the variable display will notify that a jackpot is achieved when ally character C wins over enemy character A as a result of the battle effect, and if reach effect D is executed, the result of the battle effect will be announced. When the friendly character D wins over the enemy character A, the variable display is notified that the jackpot has been won. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display of super reach ε or super reach θ, as shown in Figures 11-49 (T) to 11-49 (V), the period in which branch destination suggestion effects can be executed ends. Later, when the ally character C or the ally character D is defeated by the enemy character A, it is once reported that the variable display result is a failure.

After the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) ends, a swinging display is performed in a combination indicating the failure of the decorative symbols. At this time, if it has been decided to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. The reach effect G development suggestion images 029SG171 are displayed so that the display positions overlap.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display of a variation pattern of super reach ε, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (X), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol will be When the machine stops, it is notified again that the variable display is off. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of a variation pattern of super reach θ, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (Y), after the reach effect G development suggestion execution executable period, the reach effect G development notification As a performance, a reach performance G development notification image 029SG182 is displayed. Then, reach effect G is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-50 (Z), when the reach effect G is started, the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G and the expectation level image 029SG257 indicating the jackpot expectation level of the reach effect G are first displayed on the image display device 5. is displayed.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G is finished, a battle effect between the ally character C and the enemy character B starts, as shown in FIGS. 11-50(a) and 11-50(b). . In addition, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-9) in which the super reach θ is off, the battle performance will be changed as shown in Figures 11-50(c) and 11-50(d). As a result, when the ally character C is defeated by the enemy character B, it is reported that the variable display result is a loss, and after the battle performance (reach performance G) is finished, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach θ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-7), as shown in Figures 11-50(e) and 11-50(f), the battle performance When the friendly character C wins over the enemy character B as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance G) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

Here, the presentation mode of the reach presentation G development suggestion presentation shown in FIGS. 11-49(V) to FIG. 11-49(Y) will be described in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-54 (A) to 11-54 (B), when it is decided to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect, the decorative symbols are displayed in a oscillating manner in a combination indicating a miss. In this state, as the ready-to-reach presentation G development suggestion presentation, the first stage display of the ready-to-make presentation G development suggestion image 029SG171 is performed in the display area of the image display device 5 so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. In addition, the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 of the first stage has lower visibility from the player, such as lower brightness and fewer display colors than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative symbols. Any image is fine.

After the first stage display period of the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 ends, as shown in FIGS. 11-54(C) to 11-54(D), the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 After finishing the display, the second stage display of the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is performed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. The second stage reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 has higher brightness and more display colors than the first stage reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171. It is sufficient if the image has higher visibility from the player than the above image.

When the variable display is a variable display based on a variation pattern of super reach ε, as shown in FIG. 11-45(E), a reach effect G development notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a reach effect G development notification effect. The display of 029SG182 is not executed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display based on a variation pattern of super reach θ, as shown in FIG. Image 029SG182 is displayed and reach effect G is executed.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display with a super reach ι variation pattern or a super reach κ variation pattern, the reach effect will be displayed as shown in Figures 11-51 (g) to 11-51 (h). After the executable period of branch destination suggestion effect during execution of C or reach effect D, the shutter image 029SG006 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a preliminary effect (from the left and right of the display area to the center of the display area). The shutter image 029SG006 is moved and displayed), and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 becomes temporarily invisible due to the shutter image 029SG006.

Then, when the execution period of the preliminary effect ends based on the elapse of a predetermined period, the shutter image 029SG006 retreats from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the left and right sides as a precursor effect, and In response to the withdrawal of the shutter image 029SG006, the image of the character C becomes visible to the player in the display area of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ι, as shown in FIG. After image 029SG183 is displayed, reach effect H is executed. In addition, when the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach κ, as shown in FIG. After the reach effect development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, the reach effect I is executed. The details of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance will be described later with reference to FIG. 11-55.

If the variable display variation pattern is a variable display of super reach ι, as shown in FIG. 11-52(k), when the reach effect H is started, the image display device 5 first A title image 029SG168 of the ready-to-win effect H and an expectation level image 029SG258 indicating the jackpot expectation level of the ready-to-reach effect H are displayed.

When the display of the title image 029SG168 of the reach effect H ends, a battle effect between the ally character D and the enemy character C starts, as shown in FIGS. 11-52(l) and 11-52(m). . In addition, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι (PA2-10), the battle performance will be changed as shown in Figures 11-52 (n) and 11-52 (o). As a result, when the ally character D is defeated by the enemy character C, it is reported that the variable display result is a loss, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach ι jackpot variation pattern (PB1-8), as shown in Figures 11-52 (p) and 11-52 (q), the battle performance When the friendly character D wins over the enemy character C as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach κ, as shown in Figures 11-53 (r) to 11-53 (s), high expectation reach performance development When the ready-to-win effect I is started under the notification effect control, the title image 029SG169 of the ready-to-reach effect I and the expectation level image 029SG259 indicating the jackpot expectation level of the ready-to-win effect I are first displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, images of characters A to C are displayed together on the image display device 5 behind the title image 029SG169 and expectation image 029SG259 of the reach effect I, so that the reach effect I is It creates a special feeling because the expectation of jackpot is higher than the reach performance.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG169 of reach effect I is finished, as shown in FIGS. 11-53(t) and 11-53(u), a battle effect between ally characters A to ally characters D and enemy character C is started. In addition, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach κ (PA2-11), the battle performance will be changed as shown in Figures 11-53 (v) and 11-53 (w). As a result, when ally characters A to ally characters D are defeated by enemy character C, it is announced that the variable display result is a failure, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a failure. be done.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach κ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-9), as shown in Figures 11-53 (x) and 11-53 (y), the battle performance As a performance result, when ally characters A to ally characters D win against enemy character C, the variable display result is announced to be a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, the decorative pattern stops at the combination indicating a jackpot. Is displayed.

Here, we will explain in more detail the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance from Figure 11-37 (R) to Figure 11-37 (T) and Figure 11-53 (r) to Figure 11-53 (s). .

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 (A) to 11-55 (B), when the high-expected reach performance development notification performance is started, the reach performance F or the reach performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. A highly anticipated reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed to notify that I will be executed. Furthermore, after the high expectation reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to make the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 difficult to see. is executed.

In addition, in the blackout effect, a darkened image is displayed on the image display device 5, making it difficult to see other effect images (variable display images of decorative patterns, character images, etc.), and making it difficult to see the display screen itself. At the same time, the volume of the performance sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered than before the execution of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance. Furthermore, the light intensity of the various light emitting means (for example, LED, etc.) provided in the gaming area, the movable body 32, the glass door frame, and the gaming machine frame 3 is checked before execution of the high-expected reach performance development notification performance. By lowering it more than that, it becomes even more difficult to visually recognize other performance images (variable display images of decorative patterns, character images, etc.).

After the blackout effect is executed, the image of the character C is displayed as a preliminary effect, as shown in FIG. 11-55(C). Furthermore, in the first stage performance, the content of the lines spoken by the character C is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a character image 029SG007, and the lines are output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 11-55(D) and 11-55(E), a switching performance is executed after the first stage performance ends, and a second stage performance is performed after the end of the switching performance. As the switching effect, an image different from the image of the character C displayed in the previous stage effect is displayed. Note that although this feature section 029SG exemplifies a form in which only one image is displayed as a switching effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of a plurality of images may be displayed as a switching effect. may be displayed. In addition, when any one of a plurality of images can be displayed as a switching effect in this way, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may be varied depending on which image is displayed.

In the latter stage production, as described above, the lines spoken by the characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as the character image 029SG008, and the lines are outputted as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R. The character image 029SG008 displayed at this time has fewer characters than the character image 029SG007 displayed during the first stage performance, but the size per character is larger and brighter than the character image 029SG007 (see Figure 11-10). .

As shown in FIG. 11-55(F), after the latter stage performance ends, the movable body performance is executed. As the movable body effect, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position which is the upper position of the image display device 5 to the effect position which overlaps with the approximate center position on the front side of the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 that has fallen to the production position is moved to the origin position by driving a drive motor (not shown) or the like.

After the movable object effect is finished, as shown in Figure 11-55 (G), the reach effect according to each variation pattern (if the variable display is a variable display with the variation pattern of super reach η, the reach effect F. If the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach κ, reach effect I) is executed.

Next, variable display in a variation pattern of super reach λ will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 11-56(A) to 11-56(D), in the variable display using the variation pattern of the super reach λ, when the variable display starts, at the second timing before the reach The meter 029SG005M increases all at once to the 5th stage and becomes full. Next, at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, a telop image 029SG005T is displayed to notify that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 levels (it is full) and that a high-expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed. Is displayed.

Then, the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed without becoming a reach or executing any of the reach performance A to reach performance D. Incidentally, the performance mode of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is the same as the performance mode described above with reference to FIG. 11-55. After the execution of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance, as shown in FIG. 11-53, the reach performance I is executed and finally it is announced that the variable display result is a loss or a jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is determined by the reach performance E development notification performance. The execution period length of the performance is set to be longer than L6b, and the reach performance E is executed after the reach performance E development notification performance is started, and the variable display result is a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance E. The length of the period L11 until the notification is made is that after the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is started, the reach performance F is executed, and the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance F. L12, the length of the period from when the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is started until the reach performance I is executed and the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance I. Since the length is set to be shorter than L13, in the case where reach effect E is executed after execution of reach effect E development suggestion effect, the period until it is announced that the variable display result will be a jackpot. It is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to an excessively long period of time. In addition, in the case where the reach performance I is executed after the execution of the highly expected reach performance development notification performance, the player is suitably made to pay attention to the reach performance I before the variable display result is notified that it is a jackpot. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the r-value effect A, so it is longer than the execution period L2 of the reach effect B. The player's attention can be drawn to the reach performance B over a period of time, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, reach effect B differs from reach effect A in that the development notification effect is executed before the variable display result is announced as the effect result. Therefore, even if the reach performance E development notification performance is not executed, the player is surely made to pay attention to whether or not the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance B. It is now possible.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, while reach effect A or reach effect B is being executed, a meter effect may be executed as a effect suggesting the execution of a high expectation level reach effect development notification effect. Therefore, by executing the meter performance, it is possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, a form in which a meter effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the execution of a high-expectation level reach effect development notification effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter effect Alternatively, or in addition, the execution of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance may be suggested by the sound output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, a mode in which the meter effect can be executed only when the reach effect A or the reach effect B is executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect C or the reach effect Even when executing D, it may be possible to perform meter effects. In particular, in the variable display of super reach κ in which the advance performance and precursor performance are executed from the middle of reach performance C and reach performance D, and then the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I are executed. , a case may be provided in which the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage (changes to a display mode that notifies execution of high expectation level reach performance development notification performance) triggered by advance performance or omen performance. By doing this, by variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach ι and variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ, it is possible to check whether the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage during the execution of the preliminary effect or the precursor effect. Since the player's attention can be drawn to the game, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage at the second timing without going through the execution of reach effect A. Since the highly expected reach performance development notification performance is executed, even if the reach performance A is not executed, the player is not aware that the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed. Since the player can draw attention to the player, the player's interest in playing the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, when reach performance B is executed, high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I may be executed. Although the present invention is not limited to this, a case may be provided in which the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed after the execution of the reach performance B. By doing this, even when reach effect B is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the highly anticipated reach effect development notification effect and reach effect I will be executed. You can improve your interest.

Furthermore, in this feature section 029SG, as a meter effect, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step from the first timing to the fifth timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter 029SG005M A case may be provided in which the number is increased by two or more stages at any timing. Furthermore, when providing a timing in which the meter 029SG005M increases by two or more steps at any one of the first timing to the fifth timing, the meter 029SG005M increases at a timing before reach effect A or reach effect B starts. The rate of development to the ready-to-reach effect I may be different depending on the case where the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage at the timing after the ready-to-reach effect A or the ready-to-reach effect B is started. In addition, in this feature section 029SG, as a meter effect, a mode in which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to the fifth stage is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display mode may be changeable in four or less steps or six or more steps.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, after the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is started, the reach performance I is executed and the variable display result is the jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance I. The length of the period L13 until the notification is made is from when the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is started until the reach performance F is executed and the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance F. Since the length of the period is set to be longer than L12, the jackpot gaming state is controlled by lengthening the period until the performance result is announced when reach performance I, which has a higher jackpot expectation, is executed. It is possible to effectively increase expectations for

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-23 to 11-25, in this feature section 029SG, the meter performance that suggests the execution of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance reaches a maximum from the first timing to the fifth timing of the variable display. This is an effect in which the display mode changes step by step over five stages (six stages if you include the state where the meter effect is not executed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-45, the reach performance E development suggestion performance that suggests execution of the reach performance E in this feature section 029SG changes the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 over two stages. This is a performance that continues. In other words, in this feature section 029SG, as a meter effect, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to 5 levels, but as a reach effect E development suggestion effect, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is 2 levels. It can only change up to. For this reason, in the meter performance, the target image (meter 029SG005M) changes more easily up to the 5th stage than in the reach performance E development suggestion performance, so the player pays attention to whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, while the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to the 5th stage as a meter effect, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to the 2nd level as a reach effect E development suggestion effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 may be changeable up to the fifth stage as a reach effect E development suggestion effect. In addition, in this way, when the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to the 5th stage as the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to the 5th level. The rate of change may be set lower than the rate at which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes to the fifth stage.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, in the variable display of the super reach δ and super reach ζ fluctuation patterns, the length L5 of the period in which the meter effect can be executed is the reach effect E development suggestion effect is possible. Since the length of the period is set longer than L6a, reach performance E indicates that reach performance F, which has a higher jackpot expectation than reach performance A, will be executed after the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed. Since the ready-to-win performance E can be suggested for a longer period of time than when execution of the development notification performance is suggested, the game interest can be improved.

In this feature section 029SG, the length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set to be longer than the length L6a of the reach performance E development suggestion performance executable period, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period may be set shorter than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period.

Furthermore, although this feature section 029SG exemplifies a form in which the meter 029SG005M can be displayed on the image display device 5 even when execution of the meter effect is not determined, the present invention is not limited to this. , the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 only when execution of the meter effect is determined. Furthermore, the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 for the first time at the first stage increase timing.

Furthermore, the reach performance E development suggestion performance is a performance that can be executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the performance result of the reach performance B, so the reach performance E development is performed while the reach performance B is being executed. By executing the suggestion performance, it is possible to prevent a decline in game interest due to the player recognizing that the variable display result is not reported as a jackpot as a performance result of the reach performance B.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, as a pattern that develops from reach performance B to reach performance E, after a variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach performance B, reach performance E development notification performance and reach performance E are executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a pattern that develops from reach effect B to reach effect E, reach effect B is disclosed. A case may be provided in which the ready-to-reach performance E development notification performance and the ready-to-reach performance E are executed before the variable display result is notified as the performance result. In this way, when creating a case where reach performance E development notification performance and reach performance E are executed before the variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach performance B, when the reach performance E development notification performance and reach performance E are executed, It may be possible to execute reach performance E development suggestion performance.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-31 to 11-34, during the execution of reach effect A to reach effect F, it is possible to execute a chance-up effect, and the chance-up effect is executed in any of the effect patterns. The level of jackpot expectation varies depending on the type of player.

In particular, regarding the variable display of the super reach η that executes the reach effect F after the reach effect A, during the execution of the reach effect A, the reach title is displayed in red and the movable body 32 moves twice in total. While it is possible to execute the effects that make up the chance-up effect, during the execution of the reach effect F, the reach title is displayed in red, the movement of the movable body 32, and the stick controller 31A as an operation promotion image. The effect constituting the chance-up effect can be executed over a total of three times of image display. For this reason, regarding the variable display of super reach η in a variation pattern, the number of executions of the effects that make up the chance-up effect increases during reach effect F than during reach effect A, so that the reach It is possible to suitably draw the attention of the player to the performance result of the performance F.

Furthermore, regarding the variable display of the super reach ζ that executes the reach effect E after the execution of the reach effect B, during the execution of the reach effect B, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 and the cut While it is possible to perform the effects that make up the chance-up effect three times in total with the display of in-image 029SG200, while the reach effect E is being executed, the reach title is displayed in red and movable as a chance-up effect. The effect constituting the chance-up effect can be executed twice in total with the movement of the body 32. For this reason, regarding the variable display of super reach ζ in the fluctuation pattern, the number of executions of the effects that make up the chance-up effect is smaller during reach effect E than during reach effect B, so the reach effect Since it is possible to prevent the player from drawing too much attention to the performance result of E, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, regarding the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach ζ that executes reach effect E after execution of reach effect B, while the reach effect B is executed, the red display of the reach title and the movable body 32 and the display of cut-in image 029SG200, which constitutes a chance-up effect, can be executed three times in total.While reach effect E is being executed, the reach title is displayed as a chance-up effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Regarding the variable display of Super Reach ζ that executes reach effect E after execution of effect B, while reach effect B is being executed, the same number of effects that make up the chance-up effect can be performed as when reach effect E is being executed. You can also use it as

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, as effects that constitute the chance-up effect, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image are exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited thereto; for example, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a specific pattern, the speakers 8L and 8R output specific sounds, the light guide plate emits light, and the image display device 5 The display of the light guide plate (pseudo light guide plate), the operation of the image display device 5 itself, etc. may be included in the effects that constitute the chance-up effect.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, as effects constituting the chance-up effect, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation promotion image, etc. All of these examples are performances that are performed regardless of the player's operations (active performances), but the present invention is not limited to this. An effect (active) that is executed only when the player performs an operation such as changing the emitted light color of the game effect lamp 9 by operating an operating means such as a push button 31B or a stick controller 31A (so-called back button). (direction) may also be included.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9 and Figure 11-30, the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ is The reach performance of the super reach can be determined from the reach performance C and the reach performance D, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the reach performance C. Then, if the advance performance and the precursor performance are executed before the variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, and the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed, the reach performance If reach performance G development notification performance is executed after reach performance I is executed and a variable display result (missing) is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, it is a reach with a lower jackpot expectation than reach performance I. Performance G is executed.

Furthermore, if the preliminary performance and the precursor performance are executed before the variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, and if the reach performance H development notification performance is executed, then reach performance I. Since the ready-to-win performance H, which has a low expectation of jackpot, is executed, it is possible to diversify the performance by combining the type of reach-to-win performance and the development notification performance.

In particular, regarding the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ, the ratios shown in Figures 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B) are used. By determining which of reach performance C and reach performance D to perform, the foreshadowing performance is executed more when execution of reach performance C is decided than when execution of reach performance D is decided. Since the rate at which reach performance I (high expectation level reach performance development notification performance) is executed after reaching is set high, a predetermined relationship is established between the reach performance that is executed and the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance. It is possible to improve the performance interest of reach performance and development notification performance.

In addition, this feature section 029SG determines the reach effect to be executed from the reach effect C and the reach effect D in the variable display of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ. Although possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern in which the reach effect C is executed during the variable display and the variation pattern in which the reach effect D is executed during the variable display are separately provided. may be provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-34, the feature section 029SG determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect and the effect pattern at different rates depending on the variable display results.In other words, the chance-up effect is a reach effect. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the variable display result is executed as a performance that suggests a jackpot as a performance result, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the performance period of reach performance A to reach performance D. An executable chance-up performance may be executable as a performance that suggests that any of reach performance E to reach performance I will be executed (develop to any of reach performance E to reach performance I). .

Furthermore, as a chance-up performance, in addition to the variable display result becoming a jackpot or the execution of any of reach effects E to I, there is also a possibility of a jackpot game when the variable display result becomes a jackpot. It may be possible to suggest that the number of rounds is 10, that the probability is changed after the end of the jackpot game, etc.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-9, there are cases where the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed after the reach performance C or D is executed, and cases where the reach performance development notification performance is executed after the reach performance C or the reach performance D is executed. In the case where reach performance H development notification performance is executed, the advance performance is executed because a common preliminary performance can be executed in the period between reach performance C or reach performance D and development notification performance. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the development notification performance, and to make the player pay attention to which of the development notification performances, the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance H development notification performance, will be executed. You can improve your interest in gaming.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9 and Figures 11-27 to 11-28, during the execution period of reach effect C or reach effect D, the execution of these reach effect C or reach effect D It is suggested which of the reach performance H development notification performance and the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance will be executed later, and it is also suggested that both the execution of the reach performance H development notification performance and the execution of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance are executed. Since it is possible to execute a possible branch destination suggestion performance, the execution of the development destination suggestion performance increases the player's attention to the execution of the development notification performance, and the reach performance H development notification performance. It is possible to draw a player's attention to which of the high-expectation reach performance development notification performances will be executed, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, this feature section 029SG exemplifies a form in which it is possible to suggest that the reach performance H development notification performance will be executed and that the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance will be executed as the development destination suggestion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the development destination suggestion performance may be capable of suggesting that the reach performance G development notification performance will be executed.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, a form in which the development destination suggestion performance can be executed by variable display of the reach performance C or the fluctuation pattern for executing the reach performance C has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , it may be possible to perform the development destination suggestion performance also in the variable display of the variable pattern for executing the ready-to-reach effect A and the variable display for the variable pattern for executing the ready-to-reach effect B.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (D), a super reach performance in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed before the performance results are announced as reach performance C or reach performance D. Regarding the variation pattern of κ and the variation pattern of super reach θ in which reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G are executed after the performance result is announced as reach performance C or reach performance D, the variable display result is a jackpot. When the variation pattern of super reach κ is displayed, the difference between the rate at which reach effect C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is 60%, while the variation pattern of super reach θ Since the difference between the rate at which reach effect C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed in the variable display is 40%, reach effect I depends on whether reach effect C or reach effect D is executed. It becomes possible to guess whether it is a variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ that is executed, or a variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ that is executed with reach effect H, so reach effect C and reach effect It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of D is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot for the variation pattern of super reach κ and the variation pattern of super reach θ, reach effect C is displayed in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ. The difference between the rate at which reach effect D is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is greater than the difference between the rate at which reach effect C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Although the present invention is not limited to this, in the case where the variable display result is a failure, the reach effect C is executed by variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ. The difference between the rate at which reach effect D is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is greater than the difference between the rate at which reach effect C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. It may be set small.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It can be done.

For example, in the feature section 029SG, a configuration is exemplified in which a first pending storage display area 029SG005D and a second pending storage display area 029SG005U are provided in which a pending storage display can be displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 11-57 as modification 029SG-1, a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, a lower part of the display area of the image display device 5) In the center), an active display area 029SG005F may be provided in which a pending storage display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be displayed as an active display.

In addition, if it is possible to display the active display in this way, similar to the pre-read preview performance described above, there are multiple display modes for the active display, and depending on which display mode the active display is displayed, the jackpot can be expected. It may also be possible to perform active display effects with different degrees. For example, there are three types of active display modes: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle, and when the active display mode is a red circle, the jackpot expectation is the highest. It is sufficient that the jackpot expectation level is set to be the lowest when it is displayed in a white round shape (Jackpot expectation level of active display display mode: red > blue > white).

Furthermore, the display mode of the active display can be changed from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during variable display, and the display mode of the active display can be changed from a red circle to a red circle. It may be possible to suggest that the displayed jackpot expectation level has increased.

In this way, if the display mode of the active display can be changed during variable display, the variable display result as the effect of reach effect B, as shown in Figures 11-58 (A) and 11-58 (B). Regarding the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ in which reach effect E is executed after (missing) is once notified, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle while reach effect E is executed. Let P1 be the rate at which the red circle changes.

In addition, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, in which the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed during the execution of reach performance A, and the reach performance F is further executed, active display is displayed during the execution of reach performance A. P2 is the rate at which the display mode changes from a white circle or blue circle to a red circle. Let P3 be the rate at which the round shape changes.

At this time, P3, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while the reach effect F is executed, is displayed in the active display while the reach effect E is executed. P1, which is the rate at which the aspect changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle, or when the display aspect of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red one while reach effect A is being executed. It may be set higher than P2, which is the rate of change to a round shape.

By doing this, when a variable display is executed with a variation pattern of super reach η (when reach effect A is executed and reach effect F is executed), the high expectation level reach effect development notification effect is By changing the display mode of the active display to a red circle shape before the start, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will recognize in advance that the ready-to-reach effect F will be executed. In addition, when reach effect E is executed and when reach effect F is executed, the display mode of the active display is a red circle at a higher rate in reach effect F, which has a higher jackpot expectation than reach effect E. By changing to , the display mode of the active display can be appropriately changed to a red round shape according to the degree of jackpot expectation, so that the game enjoyment can be improved.

In addition, in the modification 029SG-1, in the variable display with a variation pattern of super reach η, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while the reach effect F is being executed. Although we have exemplified a form in which the rate of change P3 is higher than the rate P2 in which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during execution of reach effect A, the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-2, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach η as in the above-mentioned modified example 029SG-1, the display mode of the active display is white during execution of the reach effect F. The display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach effect A. In addition to setting it higher than the ratio P2, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ζ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while the reach effect E is being executed. The ratio P1 may be set higher than the ratio at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during execution of the ready-to-reach effect B.

In this way, by providing a plurality of active display modes and varying the jackpot expectation depending on which display mode the active display is displayed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the jackpot expectation. , the display mode of the active display changes to a red circle before execution of the reach performance E development notification performance or the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, causing the player to recognize in advance that the expectation of a jackpot is high. It is possible to reduce the risk of a decrease in interest in the game due to such factors.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, a variation pattern of super reach λ in which a high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed and a reach performance I is executed without going through reach performances such as reach performance A and reach performance B is described. However, as modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red one before the start of the reach effect I. The rate P5 of changing to a round shape may be set higher than the rate P6 of changing the display mode of the active display from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the ready-to-reach effect I. In this way, by changing the display mode of the active display from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before executing the reach effect I, the player is made aware in advance that the reach effect I will be executed. Since it is easy to play, it can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of reach effect I. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the ratio P5 of changing the display mode of the active display from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of reach effect I is set higher than the ratio P6 of changing from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle, the present invention This is not limited to, but in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of reach effect I. The ratio P5 may be set lower than the ratio P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the ready-to-reach effect I. By doing this, it is possible to create a situation where reach effect I is executed without going through other reach effects even though the display mode of the active display has not changed to a red circle. It is possible to add surprise to the game and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG and modifications 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, there are three types of display modes for the reserved memory display and active display: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle. Although we have exemplified a form in which the jackpot expectation level is different depending on which display mode the pending memory display or active display is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and these pending memory displays or active display The number of display modes may be only two or four or more.

Further, in the above-mentioned modifications 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, the display mode of the active display can be changed during execution of the reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the active The change timing of the display mode may include a timing other than when the ready-to-win effect is being executed, for example, during the execution of the development suggestion effect or the development notification effect, the start timing of the variable display, etc. Furthermore, if it is possible to perform a pseudo-continuous performance including temporary stopping and re-variable display of decorative symbols during variable display, the display mode of the active display may be changeable at the timing of temporary stop or re-variable display.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, three types of display formats for the suspended memory display are provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle, and depending on which display format the suspended memory display is displayed. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-4, the display mode of the reservation memory table display may be a triangle, a square, or a star in addition to a round shape. Depending on which shape the pending memory display is displayed, it is suggested which reach effect will develop into reach effect E, reach effect F, reach effect G, reach effect H, or reach effect I. It may be possible. In this case, when the CPU 103 executes the winning random value determination process and determines that the variation pattern (variation category) is super reach, it also determines which super reach variation pattern from super reach α to super reach λ. (which of reach effect A to reach effect I is executed during variable display) is determined, and the super reach variation category command (including information on which super reach variation pattern is executed) according to the determination What is necessary is to send a variable category command) to the production control board 12. By doing so, the production control CPU 120 can determine the display mode of the reserved memory table display from among round, triangle, square, star shape, etc. based on the super reach variation category command received from the CPU 103. . Furthermore, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the shape of the pending storage display even before the start of the variable display, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-4, a form that can suggest a reach effect that develops depending on the shape of the pending memory display is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the color of the pending memory display In addition to suggesting the expected level of jackpot, it may be possible to further suggest the reach effect of the development destination by the shape of the reserved memory display. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the color and shape of the reserved memory display, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification example 029SG-4, a form in which a reach effect of the destination can be suggested by the shape of the pending memory display is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the shape of the pending memory display The reach performance that can suggest the future may be only a part of reach performance E, reach performance F, reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I (for example, only reach performance E and reach performance I). .

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 029SG, as a chance-up effect, a mode is exemplified in which the characters of the reach title image can be displayed in red at the start of reach effects A to F, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 029SG-5, as a chance-up effect, the characters of the reach title image displayed in black may be changed to red halfway. In particular, when the characters of the reach title image are changed to red from the middle as a chance-up effect, the display mode of the expectation level image showing the jackpot expectation level displayed together with the reach title image can be changed (for example, , increasing the number of stars displayed as an expectation image, etc.). By doing this, the display mode of the expectation image changes as the text color of the reach title image changes from black to red, so it is possible to increase attention to the expectation image. To allow a player to accurately recognize the degree of expectation of a reach performance.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-28, regarding the variable display of super reach κ in a variation pattern, there are cases where the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is reach effect C, and reach effect D. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Regarding the variable display in the variation pattern, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the branch destination suggestion effect are displayed at different rates depending on whether the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is reach effect C or reach effect D. It may also be possible to determine the performance pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-59 as modification 029SG-6, before the variable display results are announced as reach effect C or reach effect C during execution of reach effect C or reach effect C. In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ in which a highly anticipated reach effect is executed, if the reach effect to be executed is determined to be reach effect C, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is set at a rate of 15%. The execution of pattern Decide on execution at a rate of 35%. In addition, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, if the reach effect to be executed is determined to be reach effect D, non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is The execution of pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 40%. do.

In particular, in this modification 029SG-6, if the execution of reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the execution of reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Since the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set higher (the decision ratio of non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is set lower) than when the variable display is being executed, the reach effect H It is possible to suitably suggest that a development notification performance, such as a development notification performance, a high-expected reach performance, and a development notification performance, will be executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-6, if the execution of reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the execution of reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the execution decision ratio of branch destination suggestion effects is set higher than when When execution of performance C is determined, the execution determination ratio of branch destination suggestion performance is set lower than when execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Good too.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-6, if the execution of reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the execution of reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Since the execution decision rate for pattern Z of branch destination suggestion performance (performance pattern that suggests execution of high-expectation reach performance development notification performance) is set higher than when it is determined, variable display is being executed. In this way, it is possible to more suitably suggest that a development notification performance such as a reach performance H development notification performance or a highly expected reach performance development notification performance will be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

In addition, in modification 029SG-6, if the execution of reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the execution of reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of super reach κ is exemplified. When the execution of reach effect C is determined in the variable display of super reach κ, the execution of reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variable pattern of super reach κ. The execution determination rate may be set low.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-6, as shown in FIG. 11-59, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, there are cases where the reach performance of the super reach to be executed is reach performance C, and reach performance D. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion performance and the performance pattern of the branch destination suggestion performance at different rates depending on the case, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach θ, Regarding the variable display of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the corresponding branch are determined at different rates depending on whether the super reach effect to be executed is reach effect C or reach effect D. It may also be possible to determine the performance pattern of the advance suggestion performance.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-6, there is a branch destination suggestion performance that can be executed while the reach performance C is being executed (the first advantageous result suggestion performance in the invention 033SG) and a branch destination suggestion performance that can be executed while the reach performance D is being executed. (Second advantageous result suggestion performance in invention 033SG) is illustrated as an example of a form that can be executed as a performance of the same performance mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during execution of reach performance C. The executable branch destination suggestion performance and the branch destination suggestion performance that can be executed during execution of the reach performance D may be executable as performances of different performance modes.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 to 11-9, reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects for super reach, and any of reach effects E to I is executed. Regarding the notification mode in which a variable display result is notified without development, a notification mode (first notification mode) in which any of these reach effects A to D is simply executed and a variable display result is notified is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-7, reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects for super reach, and any of reach effects E to I are executed. Regarding the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without developing, in addition to the above-mentioned first notification mode, after the variable display result is once notified as a result of reach effect A to reach effect D, A second notification mode (so-called resurrection mode) may be provided in which it is notified that the variable display result is a jackpot.

In addition, as described above, the first notification mode in which reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of super reach, and variable display results are notified without developing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I. When providing a notification mode and a second notification mode, when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode, the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z. and the rate at which the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z when the performance results (variable display results) of reach performance C and reach performance D are notified in the second notification mode are the same. Good too.

In this way, the second notification mode is used as a notification mode in which reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects of super reach, and a variable display result is notified without developing to any of reach effects E to I. By providing this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise by being notified that the variable display result is a jackpot even though the variable display result is once reported as a loss. Furthermore, the performance results (variable display results) when performing reach performance C and reach performance D are notified in the first notification mode and in the case where they are notified in the second notification mode, and branch destination suggestion effects are executed. Since the process for determining can be shared, the amount of data required for the process can be reduced.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-7, reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects for super reach, and a variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach effects E to I. When providing a first notification mode and a second notification mode as modes, when the performance result (variable display result) of reach effect C or reach effect D is notified in the first notification mode, the branch destination suggestion effect is a pattern. The ratio of execution in pattern Z and the ratio of execution of branch destination suggestion performance in pattern Z when the performance results (variable display results) of reach performance C and reach performance D are notified in the second notification mode. Although the same form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects of super reach, and any of reach effects E to I are executed. When providing a first notification mode and a second notification mode as notification modes in which a variable display result is notified without developing, the performance result (variable display result) of reach effect C or reach effect D is the first alert mode. The rate at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z when it is notified in The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z may be different.

In addition, in the modification 029SG-7, reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects for super reach, and a variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach effects E to I. Regarding the mode, the first notification mode is simply that any of these reach effects A to D is executed and the variable display result is notified, and the variable display result is once removed as the effect of reach effects A to D. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and Modification Example 029SG -8, reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, and after it is announced that the variable display result is a failure as the performance result of these reach performance C or reach performance D, reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G is executed and it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot as the performance result of the reach effect G (when the variable display is executed in the super reach θ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-7)), The rate at which the chance up effect is executed during the variable display of the super reach θ jackpot variable pattern is variable in which the effect results (variable display results) of reach effect C and reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. It may be different from the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the display. By doing this, when the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed, the execution rate of the chance-up effect depends on whether the reach effect G is executed before the variable display result is notified that it is a jackpot. Since the numbers can be made different, the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this modification, the rate at which the chance up effect is executed during the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ jackpot, the effect of reach effect C and reach effect D (variable display result) is the second notification mode. Although this example shows a different form from the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display notified by, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ jackpot is shown as an example. The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed is the same as the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display where the effect (variable display result) of reach effect C or reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode. There may be.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-27, it is possible to execute a branch destination suggestion effect in a plurality of effect patterns, and depending on which production pattern the branch destination suggestion effect is executed. Examples are given of forms in which the rate at which the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed is different. In particular, in the feature section 029SG, the case where the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in the performance pattern Z is exemplified as a form in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed at the highest rate, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, when the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in the performance pattern Z, the high expectation reach performance development notification performance may be executed at an extremely high rate (for example, 99% rate).

In particular, when the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in the performance pattern Z, the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed at an extremely high rate. In the case where the highly expected reach performance development notification performance is not executed even though it was executed in Z, or in the case where the reach performance I is executed even though the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance was not executed (so-called A pattern of production contradiction) may also be provided. In addition, if such a pattern of performance contradiction is provided, only when the variable display result is notified that it is a jackpot, branch destination suggestion performance and reach performance I in performance pattern Z are executed with the pattern of performance contradiction. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and when a branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z or a reach effect I is executed, a highly anticipated reach effect development notification effect is executed. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the game will be played, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G Regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ in which the super reach θ is executed, an example is shown in which the execution determination ratio of the reach effect C and the execution determination rate of the reach effect D are different, but the present invention does not apply to this. However, as a modification 029SG-10, the execution determination ratio of the ready-to-reach performance C and the execution determination ratio for the ready-to-reach performance D may be made the same for the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ. By doing this, in both cases where reach effect C is executed and reach effect D is executed, the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of reach effect C or reach effect D. Since the player can expect that the reach performance development notification performance will be executed after the game is completed, the player can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-10, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, a form was exemplified in which the execution determination ratio of reach performance C and the execution determination ratio of reach performance D are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in both cases where reach effect C is executed and reach effect D is executed, the variable display result as the effect of reach effect C or reach effect D is (missing). ) is announced, and if it is possible to produce an effect that the player can expect from the execution of the reach effect development notification effect, the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D. (For example, the difference between the execution decision rate of reach effect C and the execution decision rate of reach effect D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the difference between the execution decision rate of reach effect C and the execution decision rate of reach effect D. may be substantially the same) or may be different.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G Regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ where is executed, the expected degree of jackpot when execution of reach effect C is decided is smaller than the expected degree of jackpot when execution of reach effect D is decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 029SG-11, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, when execution of reach effect C is decided. The jackpot expectation level and the jackpot expectation level when execution of the reach effect D is determined may be the same. By doing this, in both cases where reach effect C is executed and when reach effect is executed, when reach effect G development notification effect is executed, a variable display result is displayed as the effect of reach effect G. Since the player can expect to be notified that the game will be a jackpot, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-11, regarding the variable display of the super reach θ variation pattern, the jackpot expectation level when execution of reach effect C is decided and the jackpot when execution of reach effect D is decided. Although a form in which the expectation level is the same is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach If it is possible to produce an effect in which the player can expect to be notified that the variable display result will be a jackpot as a result of reach effect G when the effect G development notification effect is executed, reach There is a small difference between the jackpot expectation of production C and the jackpot expectation of reach production D (for example, the difference between the jackpot expectation of reach production C and the jackpot expectation of reach production D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the reach production The jackpot expectation level of C and the jackpot expectation level of reach performance D may be substantially the same) but may be different.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-34, the reach title is displayed in red, the motion of the movable body 32, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed, and the stick is displayed as an operation promotion image as effects that constitute the chance-up effect. It is possible to display the image of the controller 31A, and the reach performance A to reach performance D that are executed before the reach performance E development notification performance and high expectation level reach performance development notification performance, and the reach performance E development notification performance and high expectation In the above example, the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 can be performed as a common effect in the reach effect E and the reach effect F that are executed before the reach effect development notification effect. However, as a modified example 029SG-12, a common effect between the red display of these reach titles and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects from reach effect A to reach effect F. The jackpot expectation level may be set to differ depending on the situation. By doing this, while suppressing the increase in the number of performances that can be performed as chance-up performances (the number of performance patterns of chance-up performances), the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are Since the player can be made to pay attention to what is going on inside the game, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-34, the variable display results indicate whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the performance of the chance-up effect at different rates depending on whether the result is a jackpot or a loss. Although a form in which a pattern can be determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a chance-up performance and the performance pattern of the chance-up performance can be any one of reach performance E to reach performance I. may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not it is executed.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as modification example 029SG-13, the highly anticipated reach performance development notification is announced before the variable display result (missing) is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D. Regarding the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ when the performance and reach performance I are executed, the chance-up performance is different depending on when the execution of reach performance C is decided and when the execution of reach performance D is decided. It may also be possible to determine whether or not to execute. In particular, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, when reach effect D is decided to be executed, chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a higher rate than when reach effect C is decided to be executed. , when it is decided to execute the ready-to-win effect D, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the modification 029SG-7, the second notification mode is such that after being once notified that the variable display result is a loss as the performance results of reach effect A to reach effect D, it is once again notified that the variable display result is a jackpot. (so-called restoration mode), but as the second notification mode, as shown in FIG. A revival effect may be performed to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot between the time and the stop timing of the variable display.

In particular, when the revival performance is executed after the variable display result is notified that the performance results of reach performance A to reach performance D are off (the variation of any of super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ) In the case where a variable display is executed in a pattern and a jackpot occurs), as shown in Figures 11-61 (A) to 11-61 (C), the length L21 of the performance period of the revival performance is changed to the reach performance. When reach performance E development suggestion performance, reach performance E development notification performance, and reach performance E are executed after the variable display result is notified as a failure as a result of B (variable depending on the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ) The length L22 of the period from the start timing of the reach effect E development suggestion effect (when the display is executed) to the end timing of the reach effect E (variable display result notification timing), and the effect results of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. When the reach effect G development suggestion effect, the reach effect G development notification effect, and the reach effect G are executed after the variable display result is once notified that it is a failure (the variable display is executed in a variation pattern of super reach θ) If the length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect G development suggestion effect to the end timing of the reach effect G (variable display result notification timing) is set shorter than L23, the effect becomes redundant. It may also be possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest due to the above (L22>L21, L23>21).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-61(A) to 11-61(C), the length L21 of the performance period of the revival performance is changed from the start timing of the reach performance E development suggestion performance to the reach performance E development notification performance. By setting the period shorter than L32, the length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect G development suggestion effect to the end timing of the reach effect G development notification effect, the variable display results can be It is possible to give a sense of surprise to the notification that the result is a failure.

In addition, in this modification example 029SG-14, a mode was exemplified in which a revival effect is executed after the variable display result is once notified that the result is a failure as a result of reach effects A to D. This is not limited to, but when the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance F are executed while the reach performance A is being executed (a variable display is executed in a variation pattern of super reach η and a jackpot occurs) ), when advance performance, precursory performance, reach performance H development notification performance, and reach performance H are executed while reach performance C or reach performance D is being executed (variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach ι) (in the case of a jackpot), when the advance performance, precursor performance, high expectation reach performance development notification performance, and reach performance I are executed during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D (variable depending on the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ) Regarding the case where the display is executed and a jackpot is achieved, there may also be a case where a revival effect is executed.

In addition, as shown in the characteristic part 029SG, the percentage of reaching a jackpot when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed (jackpot expectation level) is the percentage of reaching a jackpot when reach performance F, reach performance G, and reach performance I are executed. Since it is set lower than the ratio (jackpot expectation level), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it will be notified that the variable display result is a loss as a result of reach effect A to reach effect D. By setting the rate at which the resurrection effect is executed after reaching is higher than the rate at which reach effect F, reach effect G, and reach effect I are executed and reach the jackpot, reach effect A to reach effect D are executed and variable. Even if it is reported that the display result is a failure, it may be possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the revival effect is executed.

In addition, once reach performance B is notified that the variable display result is a failure as the performance result of reach performance B, reach performance E development suggestion performance, reach performance E development notification performance, and reach performance E are executed and a jackpot is achieved. (when a variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ and a jackpot is achieved), or after the variable display result is notified as a loss as a result of reach effect C or reach effect D, reach effect G A revival performance is also executed when the development suggestion performance, reach performance G development notification performance, and reach performance G are executed and a jackpot is achieved (when a variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ and a jackpot is achieved). You may set up a case, but in the case where the variable display is executed with these fluctuation patterns of super reach ζ and super reach θ, it will be announced that the variable display result will be off once before the revival performance, so In order to prevent the possibility that the variable display result will be out of reach as a result of the reach effect, the effect becomes redundant and the interest in the game decreases due to being notified more than once, super reach ζ and super If a variable display is executed with a variation pattern of reach θ and a jackpot occurs, the resurrection effect is not executed, or the variation pattern of super reach α to super reach γ, super reach η, super reach ι super reach κ is The revival effect may be executed at a lower rate than when the variable display is executed and a jackpot is achieved.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, although the mode in which the time saving state can be controlled after the end of the jackpot game has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of executions of the variable display is a specific number (for example, 900 times, etc.). ) may be possible to control the time saving state in response to reaching the variable display result, or in the case where the variable display result is an error, it may be possible to control the time saving state in response to a part of the error being derived and displayed. good.

In particular, when the time saving state is controlled in response to the number of executions of variable display reaching a specific number, or in the case where the time saving state is controlled in response to a partial deviation being derived and displayed. , it is also possible to perform a performance that notifies that the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance shown in the feature section 029SG or a revival performance shown in the modification 029SG-14 is controlled to a time-saving state after being executed. . By doing this, you can control the time saving state in response to the number of executions of variable display reaching a specific number, or in the case of controlling the time saving state in response to a partial deviation being derived and displayed. , Is it controlled to shorten the time by executing a highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance or a revival performance, or is the variable display result notified that it is a jackpot?A highly anticipated reach performance such as reach performance I Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the game will be executed, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as the feature part 029SG, although a mode in which both the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG are implemented is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the inventions 029SG and the invention 033SG is implemented. You may also do so.

Further, in the feature section 029SG, an example is given in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Furthermore, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described later may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a special suggestion presentation (for example, a reach presentation I) and a special suggestion presentation that suggests that the game machine is controlled to the advantageous state. The first suggestion performance (for example, reach performance A), the second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance B), the third suggestion performance (for example, reach performance F), and the fourth suggestion performance (for example, reach performance F), which have a low expectation level E) Suggestion performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing multiple types of suggestion performance including;
It is possible to execute the special development performance as the first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. In the variable display, the part where the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed during the execution of the reach performance A), and the special development is performed after it is announced that the advantageous state will not be controlled as a result of the second suggestion performance. A special development performance different from the performance can be executed as a second development pattern (for example, as shown in Figure 11-8, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ζ, the variable display result ( A development performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 10),
A development suggestion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a development suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the special development performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) In the meter performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, it is decided to execute the meter performance, in the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, the execution of the reach performance E development suggestion performance is determined, After deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG.
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect, which has a higher expectation level than the first suggestion effect (for example, , as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach η, a high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed from the execution of reach performance A, and then a portion where reach performance F is further executed) ,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, super reach In the variable display with the variation pattern of ζ, after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the performance result of reach performance B, the reach performance E development notification performance is executed, and the part where reach performance E is further executed),
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the execution period of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance) L7 is the part longer than L6b, which is the execution period of reach performance E development notification performance),
The special development effects include a primary effect in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and a effect executed after the first effect. A secondary effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the first stage information is displayed in a visible manner; A tertiary presentation (for example, the subsequent presentation shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which subsequent information with a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development performance is executed until it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled is longer than the period from when the special development performance is executed until it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled. The period is shorter (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) The length L13 and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F are the length L12 from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance E ( (the part set longer than the length L11 of the period up to (the notification timing of variable display results)),
moreover,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5),
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened, etc.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display) ) and gaming machines.
According to this feature, when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until it is announced that the advantageous state is controlled becomes excessively long, and the game interest is reduced. In addition to suppressing the decline, in the case where a special suggestion performance is executed after the execution of a special development performance, it is possible to suitably make the player pay attention to the special suggestion performance before being informed that the situation is controlled to be advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In other words, it is possible to prevent the period until the control to be controlled into an advantageous state from becoming excessively long, and the length of the effect period depending on the type of development effect, and the period from when the development effect is executed to the advantageous state. The period until it is announced that the control will be controlled changes, and the notification that the development effect and that it will be controlled in an advantageous state is executed in an appropriate length of performance period depending on the type of development effect, so the game interest is increased. In addition, after a predetermined period of time has passed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, a predetermined display (if no prize is won within the predetermined period) or a special display (in the case that no prize is won within the predetermined period) is displayed as the award amount display. When the player wins a prize) is displayed, the award amount is suitably displayed, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve gaming enjoyment and easily attract players' interest when installed in a gaming parlor.

Furthermore, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, this is an example of a gaming machine that can prevent players from losing interest in the game without making them feel anxious. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that is capable of
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5),
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed after the big prize opening is opened.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display) ) and gaming machines. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Other form examples)

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a determined special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a loss symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a production operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 13 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 13(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 13(B) shows a configuration example of the first special symbol display result determination table used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as a "jackpot" special figure than when the gaming state is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled to the small hit game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is determined to be a jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probability variable state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is the set value, as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the assignment of determination values in the fluctuation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 14, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display rendering process in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is "2". In this variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit production process in step S90174 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of the small win game state, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may also be distributed by being installed on a storage device owned by the software. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 15-1 to 15-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment starts displaying the number of earned balls after a predetermined period after the attacker becomes open in the first round game, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period. If there is no increase, a predetermined display is made to show that the number of acquired balls has not increased, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is made. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK having such features will be described below. Note that the description of the same parts as those explained in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

FIG. 15-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are all turned on. It is a diagram. The characteristic parts 042AK of this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, include a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g, the game effect lamps 9 are lit sequentially from the lower left to the lower right. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player that he should play to the right.

FIG. 15-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 12 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 15-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), a performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042 AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 042AKS002, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the winning start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the winning start specifying command is stored in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer. It should be stored in . Thereafter, the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS004). Also, settings are made to end the variable probability state and time saving state (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, processing to clear the probability variation flag and time saving flag to turn them off, processing to clear the special symbol variation counter for counting the number of executions of the special symbol game in the probability variation state and time saving state, etc. It is enough if it is executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (step 042 AKS006), the special symbol stop process is ended.

If the jackpot flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), a production waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the performance waiting time at the start of the small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the process of step 042AKS008, similar to the process of step 042AKS003, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS009). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is the value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step 042AKS011).

Also, if the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). . After executing either step 042AKS011 or step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to end the variable probability state or time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure variation counter (special figure variation count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, so that the updated special figure variation count value becomes a predetermined value. A determination is made as to whether or not it matches the special gaming state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the variable probability state and the time saving state may be terminated and controlled to the normal state by clearing the variable probability flag and the time saving flag and turning them off. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, it is sufficient to maintain the states of the probability change flag and the time saving flag and terminate the process of step 042AKS013. After executing the end determination of such probability change state and time saving state, the special symbol stop processing ends. In addition, the termination judgment based on the count value of the number of special symbol fluctuations may be performed only in the time saving state, and in the variable probability state, it may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot". . Alternatively, for example, the variable state is terminated by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the end of the variable state from a random counter provided in the RAM 102, and referring to a table for determining the end of the variable state stored in advance in the ROM 101, etc. Alternatively, a determination may be made as to whether or not to do so.

FIG. 15-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 12 as the jackpot release pre-process. In the jackpot release preprocessing shown in FIG. 15-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot start time flag is on (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start time flag is set to the on state in response to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start performance is on standby (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. 3, when updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", a predetermined timer initial value is Set in the gaming control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapse judgment value (for example, "0", etc.), it is determined that the jackpot start performance is on standby. , in response to a match, it may be determined that the jackpot start performance is not on standby.

If in step 042AKS022 the game is waiting for the performance at the start of the jackpot (step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating the game control process timer value by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), the jackpot release pre-processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 042AKS022 that the jackpot start performance is not in standby (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), and the jackpot opening number counter is cleared. (Step 042AKS025), reads the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 (Step 042AKS026), and sets an opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value. In the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type. It is only necessary to set an open control pattern different from the type. In addition, even if the jackpot type is "probable variable" or "non-probable variable," for example, different release control patterns are set for the jackpot types of "probable variable 1" and "probable variable 2." It may be set to a pattern.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the player is waiting until the big prize opening is opened in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether the game control process timer value matches the next release waiting end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the next release is waiting. For example, it may be determined that the device is not waiting for the next release. If in step 042AKS027 the game is waiting for the next release (step 042AKS027; Yes), the process advances to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. Note that the game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. 15-2, or in the jackpot release processing in step S116 in FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the next opening is not on standby (step 042AKS027; No), the grand prize opening is opened in accordance with the set opening control pattern and the count value in the grand prize opening number counter. Settings are made for this purpose (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the opening time of the big winning hole is set in the game control process timer, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a big winning prize. The grand prize opening time which is the upper limit of the time for which the mouth is kept open is set. In addition, for example, by starting outputting a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined large winning opening door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening door solenoid is turned on to open the large winning opening. Settings are made to set the status.

At this time, for example, regardless of whether the count value in the grand prize opening number counter is "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the grand prize opening opening time is set by the game control process timer. is set to

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a large prize opening designation command to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special drawing process flag is set to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening process. After updating to 5'' (step 042AKS031), the pre-processing for opening the big prize opening ends.

FIG. 15-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 12 as the jackpot opening process. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 15-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the jackpot by, for example, determining whether the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). If the game ball does not enter the big prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it, and the game ball enters the grand prize opening. A setting is made to transmit a winning designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated number-of-winnings count value has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value does not reach the predetermined number (Step 042AKS043; No), after decrementing the gaming control process timer value by 1 and updating it (Step 042AKS044), for example, the gaming control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened (step 042 AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the process during opening of the big winning hole is ended.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated number of winnings count value has reached a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened in step 042AKS045. If it is determined that (Step 042 AKS043; Yes), for example, by stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the predetermined large winning hole door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning hole is closed. The solenoid for the big prize opening door is set to be turned off (step 042AKS046), and the winning prize count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, settings are made to send a command after opening the big winning hole to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special drawing process flag is set after the opening of the big winning hole. After updating the value to "6" corresponding to the process (step 042AKS049), the jackpot opening process is ended.

In this way, the special symbol stopping process shown in Figure 15-2, the jackpot opening process shown in Figure 15-3, the jackpot opening process shown in Figure 15-4, etc. (including the jackpot opening process, jackpot end process, etc.) By being executed, the transmission settings of various performance control commands such as a winning start designation command, a command to designate when the big winning hole is open, a winning designation command, and a command to specify after opening the big winning hole are performed. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. , grasps the timing such as the start of the jackpot, opening of the jackpot (start of round) and closing (end of round), entry into the jackpot, end of jackpot, etc.

FIG. 15-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the jackpot production processing of step S176 in FIG. 14 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 15-5, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a winning end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051). The winning end designation command is executed on the main board when it is determined in the jackpot release post-processing in step S116 in FIG. This is a command sent from the 11 side, and is a command for ending the jackpot performance and executing the ending performance.

If it is determined that the winning end designation command has not been received (step 042 AKS051; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed since starting the nth R (nR predetermined period elapsed). Determination is made (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and with an initial value of "1", it is sequentially incremented by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, which will be described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, and is set as a timer value at the start of the round game, and it may be determined that the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the nRth round when the timer value becomes "0". More specifically, in response to the fact that the grand prize opening has become completely open (that is, it has been detected that the grand prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open), the main board 11 side A command for specifying that the big prize opening is open is transmitted, and counting of the timer value for a predetermined period may be started from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the round game of the first round has started, the number of acquired balls is displayed, which is a display of the number of acquired balls, and the round number, which is a display of the number of rounds, is displayed. Display is performed. On the production control board 12 side, during the period from when a jackpot is reached to when it ends (period from fanfare to ending), each time a winning designation command indicating that a game ball has entered the jackpot is received, the number of wins is calculated. The process of adding 15 is continued. When the production control board 12 receives the winning designation command, it must first analyze the command, add up the number of wins, and display the added number of wins. It takes a predetermined period of time to display the information. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processing will not be completed in time for winnings from the start of the first round round game until the elapse of the predetermined period, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of wins. , even if a player has won a prize, the process of displaying "0015" may not be able to keep up ("0015" is displayed after "0000" is displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, 0.6 seconds is set as the predetermined period, and if the game ball present at the top of the grand prize opening at the opening timing wins a prize from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed. In addition, a period is ensured in which "0015" is directly displayed instead of "0000" being displayed as the number of acquisitions. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when firing continuously, and the period from firing until entering the big prize slot is set as 0.6 seconds. Even taking into consideration, the time interval required for the game balls that are continuously fired to enter the big winning hole is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening will be one from when the grand prize opening is opened until the number of winnings is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of wins from increasing in the state before the number of wins or the number of rounds is displayed, causing the number of wins to be displayed at the timing when the number of rounds starts to be displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Although an example has been shown in which the predetermined period in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round or not. Determination is made (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, which is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and as described above, the initial value is set to "1" and is sequentially added by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, and is set to "1" in step 042AKS068. cleared. In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether n=1 by checking the value of n.

If it is determined that n=1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs a right-handed performance that suggests to the player that he should play right-handed, and also suggests that a jackpot gaming state has been reached. The operation of the fanfare performance is controlled (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, if it is determined that n≠1 (step 042AKS053; No), the production control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R and the number of acquisitions, and also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R. The operation of the jackpot performance is controlled (step 042AKS055). In the process of step 042AKS055, for example, when n=2, a round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of acquisitions are displayed, and the operation of the jackpot performance corresponding to the first round is controlled. In the process of step 042AKS055, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern according to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the grand prize opening (step 042AKS056). In addition, in the process of step 042AKS056, winnings are determined for a predetermined period after starting the nR. If the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the various display processes.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening within a predetermined period after starting the nth round (step 042AKS056; Yes), the production control CPU 120 calculates the count value of the number of balls won and put out. is added by "15" (step 042AKS057). Note that the count value of the number of acquired balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and is incremented by "15" by the process of step 042AKS057 and the process of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of acquired balls is continuously counted during the so-called consecutive games, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the end of the consecutive games. . After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the performance control CPU 120 causes the attacker lamp 9c to emit light and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). In addition, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is performed in a manner that is greater than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during the jackpot performance, for example. It emits light in a manner that notifies you of what has happened. Therefore, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved. Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of times of light emission per unit time may be greater during the winning time and during the jackpot performance. In addition, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, the winning sound is output in addition to making the attacker lamp 9c emit light regardless of whether the winning is within a predetermined period or not. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS058, the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round (first R), similarly to step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059 ). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are ended. On the other hand, if n≠1, that is, if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of acquired balls is displayed), and the number of acquired balls is displayed. After the updated display (step 042AKS060), various display processing ends. In addition, in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, when performing the update display of the number of acquired balls in the process of step 042AKS060, instead of displaying the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 as it is, As shown in 12(a-23), a count-up display (display indicating that the number of acquisitions is increasing) is performed, and then the acquisition number is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of acquired balls will increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

If it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 15-5 that a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the nth R (step 042AKS052; Yes), the production control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nth R and the number of acquisitions. At the same time, the operation control of the nR jackpot performance is performed (step 042AKS061). When n=1, that is, when it is the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of wins is updated and displayed in step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the number of winnings is incremented by 15 in step 042AKS057, so in step 042AKS061, ) As shown in Figure 15-11 (a-21), the number of wins has not increased in this jackpot after the count-up display (notification display that the number of wins has increased) is performed. Display the number of wins (display of "0015") that is different from the prescribed display (as a specific display) (if you are playing consecutive games, count the display of adding "15" to the number of wins from the previous jackpot) You can do this after uploading). On the other hand, if the game ball has not entered the jackpot before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in the current jackpot. -22), as a predetermined display, the number of wins is displayed (displaying "0000") to indicate that the number of wins has not increased (if you are playing consecutive games, the number of wins from the previous jackpot remains the same). display). In addition to "0000" as the acquisition number display (predetermined display) to indicate that the acquisition number has not increased, a non-numeric display such as "---" or "not increased" may be used. You can do it like this. Further, in step 042AKS061, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern according to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance. In this way, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of wins is not displayed, the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the grand prize opening. However, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, the effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 may be switched alternately. The display effect lamps 9 are turned on to emit more light than during a predetermined period. Therefore, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety. It is possible to liven up the performance and improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, since the performance effect lamp 9 is made to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the performance during the jackpot, the performance can be excited at once at the timing when the performance during the jackpot is executed, and the game interest can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the grand prize opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS063), The attacker playing card 9c emits light, outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning, displays a count-up display (notices that the number of wins increases), and then displays the winning number to update the winning number. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the process of step 042AKS064, or if the winning designation command is not received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the n+1R, which is the next round after the nR, has started. It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042 AKS065, the determination may be made based on, for example, whether or not a large prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R has been received from the main board 11 side. If the (n+1)th R has not started, that is, if the grand prize opening designation command has not been received and the nth R remains (step 042 AKS065; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the various display processes as is. . On the other hand, when the (n+1)th R starts, that is, when the big prize opening designation command indicating the start of the (n+1) R is received (Step 042AKS065; Yes), "1" is added to n (Step 042AKS066), and various display processing is performed. end. For example, if n=1, that is, the first round, n=2 in step 042AKS066. Note that although n=2 and it is the second round, until the predetermined period has passed, it is determined as No in steps 042AKS052 and 053, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round, which is the n-1R. A round display is performed, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (displayed in the process of step 042AKS061 after determining Yes in step 042AKS052).

If it is determined in step 042AKS051 that the winning end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to end the jackpot performance corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending performance (step 042AKS051; Yes). 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and ends various display processing.

Next, display timings such as round number display and acquisition number display and examples of production operations will be specifically explained with reference to FIGS. 15-6 to 15-14. In the illustrated example, the case is not during a consecutive game, but is a so-called first hit (first jackpot).

FIG. 15-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. FIGS. 15-7 to 15-14 are diagrams showing examples of performance operation displays, opening/closing states of the grand prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps on the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 15-6 and 15-7 (a-1), when the combination of decorative symbols constituting a jackpot is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game state is entered. At this stage, the grand prize opening is in a closed state as shown in FIG. 15-7 (b-1). In addition, in order to notify the player of the jackpot, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (c-1), a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable lamp 9d, a speaker lamp 9eL, Various performance effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower stage is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2.

When a jackpot is hit, as shown in Figure 15-6, a right-handed performance and a fanfare performance are performed to notify the player that they should play right-handed until the end of the predetermined period of the first round (Figure 15-6). 5, step 042AKS054). Note that the period from the jackpot to the start of the first round shown in FIG. 15-6 is a period that is sufficiently longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (c-2), All the production effect lamps 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in this order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center part, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and a right-hand hitting effect is performed in which "hitting right" is displayed in a large size on the image display device. It should be noted that the small right-hitting display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 15-7(a-2) may be continuously displayed during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed performance, as shown in Figures 15-7 (a-3) to 15-10 (a-19), the image display device 5 displays the "right-handed hit" superimposed on the fanfare image. The display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the production effect lamps 9 will be explained below. When the right-handed performance starts, as shown in Figure 15-7 (c-3), the general winning hole vicinity lamp 9g provided at the lower left of the gaming area lights up first, and then the lamp 9g in the vicinity of the general winning hole lights up, as shown in Figure 15-7 (c-3). As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left portion, is lit. Next, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (c-5), among the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left display device lower lamp 9fL lights up, and then As shown in Figure 15-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left part, lights up, and as shown in Figure 15-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L part lights up. 9eL lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko game machine 1. Note that, as shown in FIG. 15-8 (b-7), since the grand prize opening is in a closed state, the ejected game media does not enter the grand prize opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 15-8 (b-7) shows an example in which the fired game ball passes through the second path in the upper part of the big prize opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 15-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided at the upper center portion of the game board 2 lights up, and as shown in FIG. ), when the main lamp 9 above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 lights up, the performance effect lamp 9 provided at the upper center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 lights up.

Next, as shown in Figure 15-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R part lights up, and then as shown in Figure 15-8 (c-11), the frame lamp in the upper right part 9 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 15-8 (c-12), among the lower display lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the right display device Lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 15-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right portion, lights up, and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. do. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1. As a result, the effect lamps 9 light up in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, then to the center part, and then from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the effect lamp 9 lights up the player's right hand. There will be a right-handed performance that suggests. In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which both the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 were used to suggest right-handed play. It may be. In addition, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 lights up from the lower left side to the center to the lower right side, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 lights up from the lower left side to the center and right side. Both may be turned on independently, at the same time or with a time difference, such as in the downward direction.

After the right-handed performance on the performance effect lamps 9 is completed, all the performance effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 15-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 15-9 (a-15), the right-hitting display on the image display device 5 continues to be performed (the right-hitting effect itself is being executed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 15-6, when the opening timing of the big winning hole comes, the 1st R is started, and the big winning hole is opened as shown in FIG. 15-10 (b-16). At this stage, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (a-16), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 continues, and until a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (c-16). As shown, all the production effect lamps 9 remain off (the same applies up to FIGS. 15-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all of the performance effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any one of the indicators such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set lower than usual. In addition, as shown in Figure 15-10 (b-16), even after the big prize opening is opened, until a predetermined period has elapsed, Figures 15-7 (c-3) to 15-9 As shown in (c-13), the effect lamps 9 may be lit in sequence to suggest right-handed hitting. In this case, the lighting speed of each production effect lamp may be made faster than before the opening of the grand prize opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the changing speed may be made faster). In addition, when the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit to suggest a right-handed shot after the big prize opening is opened, the lighting of the attacker lamp 9c, which is lit last, is as shown in Figure 15-9 (c-15). It is also possible to leave the light on instead of turning it off. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big prize opening is in the open state.

Then, as shown in Figure 15-10 (b-17), when the grand prize opening is completely opened, a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period corresponding to the first R starts, and as shown in Figure 15-10 As shown in (b-18), when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the production control board 12 side. In addition, for game balls that are fired due to a right-handed performance before the 1st round starts (before the grand prize opening is open) (game balls that are hit quickly), the grand prize opening will be in the open state. If it exists above the big winning opening at the timing when , it becomes possible to win within the predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R. On the side of the production control board 12, through the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 15-5, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 15-10 (b-18), and the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 15-10 (c-18). As shown in , the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize. As described above, the attacker lamp 9c emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during a jackpot performance, for example. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 15-10 (b-18), the fired game ball passes through the first route, which is the route in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning route where the count switch 23 is provided. An example is shown below. In addition, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present in the big winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game balls present above the grand prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period of time after the opening of the grand prize opening, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game without making him feel anxious. It can be prevented.

As shown in Figure 15-10 (b-18), after the game ball enters the big winning hole, or after time passes without winning from the state shown in Figure 15-10 (b-17), 10(a-19), (b-19), and (c-19), when the predetermined period of time has passed, the round number display and jackpot effect corresponding to the 1st R will be displayed as shown in Figure 15-6. Since it is the execution timing and the acquisition number display execution timing, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 15-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 15-10 (b-18), if the game ball enters the grand prize opening before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 15-11 (a-20), A round number display of "1R" indicating one round is displayed, and a count-up display is also performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot effect (first R effect), as shown in Figure 15-11 (a-20), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed. , and characters are displayed. Note that the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot displayed as the jackpot performance (first R performance) and the display of "BOUNUS in progress" are not shown in the figure (the same applies to Figures 15-20, which will be described later). As shown in 15-21, it is displayed in a manner suggesting that the ball should be hit to the right. Specifically, as shown in Figure 15-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or a right-handed performance is performed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the big winning opening is opened, as shown in Figure 15-21 (A-1), as a jackpot performance, As shown in (A-2), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, is displayed facing forward, and above "B" in the "BOUNUS" display. A star-shaped image is displayed. Next, as shown in Figure 15-21 (A-3), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, is tilted toward the back right, and the "BOUNUS in progress" display changes to "7". A star-shaped image moves to the top of "O". Next, as shown in Figure 15-21 (A-4), the "7" symbol that constitutes the jackpot faces forward, and a star appears above the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. Images of shapes shift. After that, as shown in Figure 15-21 (A-5), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, becomes tilted toward the back left, and the "U" of the "BOUNUS in progress" display appears. A star-shaped image moves to the top of ``. Then, as shown in Figure 15-21 (A-6), the "7" symbol, which is the decorative symbol that makes up the jackpot, faces forward again, and a star appears above the "S" in the "BOUNUS" display. The image of the shape shifts and returns to Figure 15-21 (A-2). In this way, in the jackpot production, the decorative symbols that make up the jackpot move toward the back right, the front, and the back left, and a star-shaped image moves from the left character of the "BOUNUS" display to the right. By shifting the , it is suggested to the player that he should hit to the right. The motion display of the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot and the transition display of star-shaped images are called effect displays.In addition to this, effect displays include, for example, a predetermined image rotating clockwise, or a character gradually changing. This includes indications such as turning to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner that suggests right-handed hitting. According to this, the effect display suggests that the ball should be hit to the right, making it easier to recognize that the ball should be hit to the right.

In addition, during the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (c-20), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern set in advance according to the jackpot performance. In this example, it is assumed that a light emitting pattern is set in which the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately turned on. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. In this way, as shown in FIGS. 15-9 (c-16) to (c-19), until the grand prize opening is in the open state and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the production effect lamp 9 is not emitted, as shown in FIG. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is made to emit light after the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball entering the grand prize opening, the count-up display will not be performed and the number of acquisitions will be displayed as "0000" as shown in Figure 15-11 (a-22). is displayed. In addition, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is one round is performed, and as a jackpot production (1st R production), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the light emitting pattern set in advance according to the effect during the jackpot are common regardless of whether a prize is won or not.

Next, as time passes and as shown in Figure 15-12 (b-23), when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1R, the upper limit for opening the grand prize opening period. In addition, in conjunction with the winning, the process of step 042AKS064 shown in Figure 15-5 is executed, a count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 15-12 (a-23), and the count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 15-12 (a-24). As shown in the figure, the number of acquisitions "0150" is displayed. In addition, with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in Figure 15-12 (b-23), and in addition to lighting the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the jackpot performance, ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize. In addition, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened, it is a sufficient period even if counted from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the predetermined period has elapsed. Since the continuous firing interval is 0.6 seconds, this is a sufficient period for winning 10 prizes. Therefore, since sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

When the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1st round, it becomes the upper limit period in which the grand prize opening can be opened, so as shown in Figure 15-12 (b-24), the grand prize opening It is controlled to be in a closed state. After that, until the second R shown in FIG. 15-6 starts, the big prize opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 15-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed (until the predetermined period has elapsed after n=2), the number of rounds corresponding to the first R is displayed as shown in Figure 15-12 (a-25). , the jackpot effect continues to be performed (the display of the number of wins is updated according to the winnings), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the jackpot effect as shown in Figure 15-12 (c-25). and lights up.

In addition, when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1st round and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize opening is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball enters the grand prize opening. A so-called over-win may occur in which the player enters the grand prize opening after the 10th game ball. Even in the case of over-winning, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 15-12 (a-23), and the number of wins of "0165" may be displayed. In this case, after the count-up display and the number of acquisitions are displayed according to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-win are displayed, but as shown in Figure 15-12 (b-25) As shown in , the count-up display and the number-of-wins display corresponding to the over-win are completed within the period from when the big winning opening is completely closed until before it becomes open state corresponding to the 2nd R. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize that an over-win has occurred in the first round, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, since the update of the number of wins displayed in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the number of wins displayed in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is difficult to determine which one is the winning number corresponding to the opening of the round. It becomes easier. Further, the winning sound corresponding to an over winning sound may be a sound different from a normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, if the count value exceeds the upper limit value of "10" and the winning is achieved, the over winning sound may be output. Further, the attacker lamp 9c may also be caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to an over-winning mode, unlike the light emission in a normal winning mode.

Then, in response to the second round, as shown in Figure 15-6, the big prize opening becomes open again, and as shown in Figure 15-13 (b-26), the big winning mouth opens again. controlled to become In this case, it is determined Yes in step 042AKS065 of FIG. 15-5, that is, the big prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R is received, and the process of 042AKS066 is executed, so that n=2. Become. At this stage, the process of step 042AKS055 in Figure 15-5 is executed, so as shown in Figures 15-13 (a-26) and (c-26), the jackpot effect and the number of rounds corresponding to the 1st R are A display is made (see also Figure 15-6).

Next, when the grand prize opening is completely opened and the game ball enters the grand prize opening as shown in Figure 15-13 (b-27), unlike in the first round, the step shown in Figure 15-5 is In the process of 042AKS060, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 15-13 (a-27), and an acquired number of "0165" is displayed as shown in FIG. 15-13 (a-28). In addition, with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in Figure 15-13 (b-27), and in addition to lighting the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the jackpot performance, ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up. In this way, in rounds other than the first round, even if the prize is won during the predetermined period, the number of wins is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 15-5 is executed, so as shown in FIG. 15-14 (a-30), "2R ” is displayed, and a jackpot effect corresponding to the second round is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". That is, "R" has been displayed continuously since the first round. Moreover, the display of "1R" continues to be displayed until the second R predetermined period has elapsed. In addition, the feature section 042AK of this embodiment shows an example in which a common jackpot effect is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to lighting control of the effect lamp 9), but it is executed in each round. The presentation during the jackpot may be different. The same applies to lighting of the production effect lamp 9. In this way, since the grand prize opening is opened before the round number display indicating that it is the second round, the game ball of the player who has been firing continuously since the first round is released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize opening. Therefore, in each round of a plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that successive game balls will win a prize in the big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 15-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the grand prize opening is controlled to open in response to the 2nd R, and as shown in Figure 15-13 (a-29). 15-14 (a-31 ), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of acquisitions obtained in the 1st R continues to be displayed. From then on, the same process is performed until the final round determined in advance, and when it is determined that the winning end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. 15-5, a jackpot effect corresponding to the round is performed to perform the ending effect. Configure settings to terminate. In this way, from the second round onward, if you do not win within the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, but if you win within the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed will continue to be displayed. , the number of acquired balls is added to the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning opening even in the second and subsequent rounds.

For example, in the final round, if the 10th game ball enters the grand prize hole and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball enters the grand prize hole. As shown in FIG. 15-15, the jackpot game state may end with the ball stuck in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, the game ball will enter the big winning hole at the start of the 1st R (when the big winning hole corresponding to the 1st R is opened) in the case of the next jackpot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R. A winning game ball occurs. In this case, as shown in Figure 15-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner to notify that the prize has been won, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in Figure 15-11 (a-20) and As shown in (a-21), after performing a count-up display, "0015" may be displayed as the acquisition number display. In addition, in such a case, there is a possibility that the fired game ball will win more prizes during the predetermined period (possibility that the second ball will win the prize), and in that case, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the game ball shown in Figure 15-11 ( As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after performing a count-up display, it is sufficient to display "0030" directly as the acquisition number display without displaying "0000" or "0015". According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase the interest in the game.

As explained above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature part 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the number of wins in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 15-5 after a predetermined period after the big prize opening is opened and the first round is started. If the game ball does not enter the grand prize slot within a predetermined period after the first round has started, a predetermined display is made after the predetermined period to indicate that the number of wins has not increased, and If the game ball enters the big winning hole within a predetermined period after one round has started, the number of wins is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, the production control CPU 120 directly specifies the winning number without displaying the number of wins of "0000" as a predetermined display. A display of the number of acquisitions of "0015" is displayed as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent confusion from being caused to the players and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display to notify that the number of wins will increase if the game ball enters the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the first round has started. , displays the acquisition number display of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a winning and the number of wins increases.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command for specifying the opening of the opening of the opening that is transmitted from the main board 11 in response to the opening of the opening of the opening. The number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 allows the launched game balls to pass through the second route at the upper part of the grand prize opening door and guide them to the ejection path by keeping the grand prize opening door in a closed state. By opening the winning opening door, the fired game balls are guided to the big winning opening through a first route and detected by a count switch 23. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the counting switch 23 detects the game ball present at the door of the big winning opening is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period of time. . According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present at the top of the grand prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the grand prize opening, and the player can enjoy the game without feeling anxious. It is possible to prevent a decrease in

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-6, the performance control CPU 120 performs a right-handed hit as shown in FIG. By performing a performance, it is displayed to the player that he should hit the ball to the right. According to this, since the game area to be fired during a jackpot is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game enjoyment can be improved.

The open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening is completely open, that is, the big winning opening door has moved to a completely open position, and the big winning opening door is completely open. In response to detecting that the main board 11 has moved to a completely open position, a command to designate the opening of the big prize opening is transmitted from the main board 11 side. According to this, since a predetermined period of time is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, for game balls that are fired due to the right-handed performance before the 1st round starts (before the grand prize opening is open) (game balls that are hit quickly), the grand prize opening is in the open state. If there is a prize at the top of the big prize opening at the timing when Displays the number of acquisitions as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game balls hit quickly from being wasted.

In addition, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize opening is controlled to be closed, but at this time, when the 11th game ball enters the grand prize opening As shown in FIG. 15-15, the jackpot game state may end with the ball stuck in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, the game ball will enter the big winning hole at the start of the 1st R (when the big winning hole corresponding to the 1st R is opened) in the case of the next jackpot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R. A game ball wins, and the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of wins as a specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a fanfare performance that indicates that a jackpot game state has been entered until the big prize opening changes from a closed state to an open state. Then, after the big prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the round number is displayed together with the winning number, and it is possible to execute a jackpot performance corresponding to the round game. According to this, it is possible to add variety to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (b-18), the production control CPU 120, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, The attacker lamp 9c is turned on as shown in FIG. 15-10 (c-18). In addition, as shown in Figure 15-12 (b-23), even if a game ball enters the grand prize opening other than the predetermined period, the attacker lamp will appear as shown in Figure 15-12 (c-23). Turn on 9c. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving players a sense of anxiety, and it is possible to visually recognize that a prize has been won within a predetermined period of time. It becomes easier.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. The device emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times the light is emitted per hour (a manner that notifies winnings). According to this, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (b-18), the production control CPU 120, if a game ball enters the big winning hole during a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened, A winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15-12 (b-23), even if a game ball wins in the grand prize opening other than the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is outputted. According to this, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, for the rounds after the first round, the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the round in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 15-5 after a predetermined period after the start of the round. conduct. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning successive game balls into a big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

In addition, when the second round and subsequent round games are played, if the game medium does not enter the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened, the performance control CPU 120 controls the As shown in 15-14 (a-31), when the winning number display that was displayed in the previous round game continues to be displayed, and the gaming medium enters the corresponding grand prize slot within the specified period. As shown in FIG. 15-14 (a-30), the number of acquired balls awarded corresponding to the winning is added and displayed from the acquired number displayed in the previous round game. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big prize opening even in the second round and onwards.

Furthermore, even when an over-win occurs, for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as shown in FIG. 15-12 (a-23), and displays the number of wins of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of acquisitions are displayed according to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-win are displayed, but as shown in Figure 15-12 (b-25) As shown in , the count-up display and the number-of-wins display corresponding to the over-win are completed within the period from when the big winning opening is completely closed until before it becomes open state corresponding to the 2nd R. According to this, since the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning.

In addition, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of wins is not displayed, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game as shown in FIG. 15-10 (c-18). Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball enters the big prize opening, in a situation where the number of wins is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, for example, as shown in Figure 15-11 (c-20) and ( c-21), the production effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are turned on alternately, and more The production effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel anxious, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to enliven the performance that follows, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the right-handed performance and the fanfare performance before the start of the first round, as shown in FIG. 15-6. 15-7 (c-3) to 15-9 (c-13) as shown in FIG. 15-7 (c-3) to FIG. 15-9 (c-13) to suggest a right-handed hit. For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect provided on the game board 2 The lamps 9 are turned on alternately. According to this, it is possible to suggest right-handed hitting using the production effect lamp 9. In addition, when the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit to suggest a right-handed shot after the big prize opening is opened, the lighting of the attacker lamp 9c, which is lit last, is as shown in Figure 15-9 (c-15). Instead of turning off the light, the light may be left on as is. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the grand prize opening is in the open state.

Furthermore, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if counted after the predetermined period has elapsed for 10 game balls to win. According to this, since sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 operates as shown in FIGS. 15-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, that is, until the number of wins is displayed. 15-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 is not turned on until the number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIGS. 15-11 (c-20) and (c-22). let According to this, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 15-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production control CPU 120 causes the production effect lamp 9 to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot production after a predetermined period has elapsed. let According to this, the performance can be made more exciting at once at the timing when the performance during the jackpot is executed, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-21, at the timing when the number of wins is displayed, the production control CPU 120 displays an effect display that transitions and displays decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute a jackpot, suggesting a right-handed hit. Do it in a certain manner. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should play to the right, making it easier for the player to recognize that the player should play to the right.

(Modified example of characteristic part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the production effect lamps 9 light up in order to suggest that you should hit the ball to the right. Although an example has been shown in which all the performance effect lamps 9 are turned off after the right-handed performance using the performance effect lamps 9 is finished, this is just one example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 15-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the state shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 15-16 (c-16A), at the timing when the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. An attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be turned on. According to this, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize that the big prize opening is in the open state. Note that the attacker lamp 9c may continue to be lit until a predetermined period of time has elapsed or during the open period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when updating the round display from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". , an example has been shown in which "R" is continuously displayed from the first round and "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in Figure 15-17, at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the big prize opening becomes closed, the display of "1" among the displays of "1R" is erased. , only "R" may be displayed. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the second R predetermined period has elapsed, and a round display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round may be performed. The same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, it is possible to visually confirm the end of each round, and it is possible to add variety to the game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the number of winnings that becomes the upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened is 10 (the upper limit number of winnings is 10), but for example, if the upper limit winnings is 1, , it may be arranged so that if two pieces are won during a predetermined period before the round number is displayed, the winning is over. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound) may be output as the winning sound for over winning during the predetermined period, and the attacker lamp 9c may also be made to emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of over winning. .

In addition, in the above embodiment, regarding the number of wins displayed, an example was shown in which winnings of game balls into the big winning hole are counted, but in addition to this, winnings into the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Good too. In addition, since right-handed hitting is performed during the jackpot, the general winning hole that wins the prize is the general winning hole 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIGS. 15-18 are flowcharts showing an example of various display processes when winnings in the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Note that explanations of parts similar to those in FIG. 15-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIGS. 15-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS056 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the general winning prize indicating that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 is further shown. It is determined whether the specified command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042 AKS081; Yes), the production control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls acquired ( Step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or if the general winning designation command is not received, that is, if there is no winning in the general winning hole 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process moves to step 042AKS059. In addition, with the winning to the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won to the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the winning sound when winning to the grand winning hole) may be output.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIGS. 15-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS062 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS062; No), it is further shown that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether a general prize designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the production control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won ( Step 042AKS083), and the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed (Step 042AKS085). When displaying the updated number of acquisitions in step 042AKS085, a count-up display (display indicating that the number of acquisitions has increased) is performed, and then the acquisition number is displayed. After executing the process of step 042AKS085, or if the general winning designation command is not received, that is, if there is no winning in the general winning hole 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the process moves to step 042AKS065. In addition, with the winning to the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won to the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the winning sound when winning to the grand winning hole) may be output.

Next, an example of the production operation in the case where winnings to the general winning hole 10 are also counted will be explained with reference to FIGS. 15-19 and 15-20. FIGS. 15-19 and 15-20 are diagrams showing examples of performance operation displays, opening/closing states of the grand prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps on the image display device 5. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Figure 15-19 are ( Same as a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the grand prize opening is opened, a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When the game ball enters the general winning hole 10, the state shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 15-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball enters the general winning hole 10 as shown in Figure 15-19 (b-18A), or from the state shown in Figure 15-19 (b-17), the game ball also enters the general winning hole 10. When time passes without any winnings in the winning slot 10, and a predetermined period of time passes as shown in Figures 15-19 (a-19A), (b-19A), and (c-19A), the game ball is awarded a general prize. If the prize is won in the mouth 10, the state shifts to the states shown in Figures 15-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in Figure 15-20 (a-20A). , a round number display of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is performed, and a count-up display is also performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot effect (first R effect), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, as shown in Figure 15-20 (a-20A). , and characters are displayed. In the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 15-20 (c-20A), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the acquisition number display.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball entering the general winning hole 10, as shown in FIG. " is displayed. In addition, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as a jackpot production (1st R production), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to a preset light emission pattern according to the effect during the jackpot are common regardless of whether a prize is won or not.

In this way, even if a game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined prize After the period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the number of wins in response to winnings in the general winning hole 10. In addition, when no game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded. Therefore, since the number of winnings corresponding to the winnings is also displayed for game balls that have entered the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent players from feeling anxious.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 042AK is:
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened, etc.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display) ),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display (for example, displays "0015" instead of displaying "0000") when the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period. display, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent confusion among players and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
When the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, the display means performs a count-up display indicating that the gaming value has been given, and then displays the value given as the specific display. Display according to the gaming value (for example, display "0015" after performing a count-up display to notify that the number of acquisitions will increase),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that there has been a winning and the number of wins has increased.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The display means starts displaying the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed after receiving the command indicating that the variable prize winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, when the main board 11 Start counting the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the big prize opening designation command sent from the side),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The variable winning means is configured to lead the game medium to the winning path by being in the first state (for example, by opening the big prize opening door, the variable winning means causes the fired game ball to pass through the first path). (for example, by closing the grand prize opening door, the ejected game ball is a detection means (for example, a count switch 23) that is formed in the winning route and detects winning of the game media. etc.) and,
The time from the path forming means to the detecting means for the game medium is within the predetermined period (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured to wait until the counting switch 23 detects the game ball present in the big winning opening door part). (e.g., the time is configured so that it is less than a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present above the grand prize opening will be detected within a predetermined period of time after the grand prize opening is opened, and the game enjoyment can be improved without giving the player a sense of anxiety. The decline can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
After being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation promotion display is displayed to encourage the player to perform the operation (for example, after the jackpot has been won, the jackpot may be in an open state). Until this happens, as shown in Figure 15-7 (a-3), by performing a right-handed effect, it is displayed to the player that he should play right-handed),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The first state is a state in which the variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example, the open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening is completely opened, In other words, the big prize opening door has moved to a completely open position, and in response to detecting that the big winning opening door has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 is activated. (e.g. a command is sent from the side to specify when the big prize opening is open),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
Before the first round game in the advantageous state is started, when the operation promotion display is performed and the ejected game medium enters the variable winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the specified Display a display (for example, before the start of the 1st round, a game ball launched by a right-handed performance is able to win a prize at the timing when the grand prize opening is open, and a prize can be won within the predetermined period) (If you do so, the number of acquisitions will be displayed as a specific display after a certain period of time, etc.)
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent game media fired before a round game is started from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above,
In the last round game of the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state is held with the game medium sandwiched between them. (For example, in the final round, the 11th game ball is caught in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a) (e.g., the jackpot game state ends while the state is still the same),
In the first round game when the control is again controlled to the advantageous state, the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, so that the game medium in the pinched state wins a prize in the variable winning means. In this case, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the next jackpot is won, the game ball enters the jackpot at the start of the 1st round, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the specific display is displayed. display, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above,
Until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests that the variable winning means has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big prize win). Until the mouth changes from the closed state to the open state, a fanfare effect indicating that a jackpot game state has been entered can be executed), and is executed at the same time as the display of the award amount display starts after the predetermined period has elapsed. It is possible to display a round game that allows you to identify the round game that is being played, and to perform an in-round performance that corresponds to the round game (for example, after the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined period has elapsed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of wins). (e.g., it is possible to perform a jackpot performance corresponding to round games),

According to such a configuration, it is possible to add variety to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 043AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 043AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 043AK is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened, etc.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display). ),
A light emitting means (for example, a production effect lamp 9, etc.),
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means determines whether the gaming medium has won a prize in the case where the gaming medium has entered the variable winning means after the elapse of the predetermined period and when the gaming medium has entered the variable winning means before the elapse of the predetermined period. Control the light emitting means with a light emitting pattern corresponding to (for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the big prize opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether or not the prize is won within a predetermined period),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and also when a prize is won within a predetermined period. becomes easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (such as an attacker lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium is won in the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means ( For example, a production effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c),
When a game medium is won in the variable winning means, the specific light emitting means emits light more often than the predetermined light emitting means per unit time (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042 AKS058 (step 042AKS064) in a manner that is greater than the number of times of illumination per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during the jackpot performance (a manner that notifies that a prize has been won), etc.)
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Further comprising sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.),
The sound output means includes:
outputting a winning sound corresponding to winning when the gaming medium wins in the variable winning means;
The winning sound is output when the game medium enters the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed, and when the game medium enters the variable winning means before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the game medium enters the variable winning means into the grand prize opening). If a ball wins a prize, a winning sound is output regardless of whether the ball wins within a predetermined period of time, etc.)
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 044AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 044AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 044AK is:
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
It is possible to display a round game display that allows identification of the round game being executed (for example, displaying the number of rounds),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the award amount display and the first round game are displayed. display the round game display corresponding to the round game (for example, in the first round, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the big prize opening is opened, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed),
When the second or subsequent round game among the plurality of round games is played, the second or subsequent round game occurs after the predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. Displaying the round game display corresponding to the round game (for example, in the second round, after a predetermined period of time has passed after the big prize opening is opened, the number of rounds is displayed),
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display) ),
It is characterized by

According to this configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving players a sense of anxiety, and also to , it is possible to increase the possibility that successive game balls will win a prize in the big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the second and subsequent round games are played, if the game medium does not enter the variable winning means within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state; , The award amount display that was displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed (for example, when the second round and subsequent round games are played, within a predetermined period after the big prize opening is opened) If the game medium does not enter the grand prize slot, the winning number display that was displayed in the previous round game will continue to be displayed, as shown in Figure 15-14 (a-31), etc.)
When the second and subsequent round games are played, if the game medium enters the variable winning means within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state; , from the award amount displayed in the previous round game, the award amount corresponding to the gaming value awarded in response to the winning is added and displayed (for example, if the game media is sold within a predetermined period) When a prize is won in the corresponding big prize slot, as shown in Figure 15-14 (a-30), the number of earned balls awarded in response to the prize will be changed from the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round game. (such as adding and displaying numbers),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning hole even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The display means is capable of updating and displaying the award amount display that is being displayed in response to winning of the game medium in the variable winning means,
The updating display of the award amount display ends after the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state and before it returns to the first state again (for example, when the grand prize opening is completely closed). (e.g., the count-up display and the number of wins corresponding to the over winnings are completed within the period from when the winnings are completed until the opening state corresponding to the 2nd R is reached),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, the update of the number of wins displayed at the time of one release does not overlap with the update of the number of wins displayed at the next release, making it easy to determine which release corresponds to the winning number. .

(Description of means related to characteristic part 045AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 045AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 045AK is:
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed after the big prize opening is opened.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display) ),
A plurality of light emitting means (for example, a production effect lamp 9, etc.),
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means is configured such that when the variable winning means is in the first state and the award amount display after the predetermined period is displayed, the variable winning means is in the first state. Control is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit more light than when the award amount display is not displayed before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, during the predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the acquisition amount display is not being performed, the control shown in FIG. 15- As shown in 10 (c-18), although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the grand prize opening, in a situation where the number of wins is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2. (e.g., lighting them alternately and emitting more light from the production effect lamps 9 than during a predetermined period),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to enliven the performance after the game is performed and improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
After being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, it is possible to display an operation promotion display that encourages the player to perform an operation (for example, a right-handed display is displayed);
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (such as an attacker lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium is won in the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means ( For example, a production effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c),
When the variable prize winning means is in the first state, when the award amount display is not displayed before the predetermined period has elapsed, the specific light emitting means is made to emit light, and the predetermined light emitting means is made to correspond to the operation promotion display. The specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game when the award amount display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the big prize opening is After the release, until a predetermined period has elapsed, the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit as shown in FIGS. 15-7 (c-3) to 15-9 (c-13) to suggest a right-handed hit, After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, for example, as shown in FIGS. When the production effect lamps 9 are lit alternately and the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right-handed hit, after the last attacker lamp 9c is lit, the 15-9 (c-15), do not turn off the light and leave it on as is),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, it is possible to promote the operation using the predetermined light emitting means, and it is also possible to make the player aware that the variable prize winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
In the round game, one round game ends when a specific number of game media win, and the game moves on to the next round game (for example, a grand prize opening is opened when 10 game balls win a prize). ),
The time from when the predetermined period elapses until the variable winning means enters the second state is sufficient time for the game medium to win the specified number of prizes (for example, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened) (For example, it is a sufficient period of time to count from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, sufficient time is ensured for winning a prize, so it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In the round game, one round game ends when a specific number of game media win, and the game moves on to the next round game (for example, a grand prize opening is opened when 10 game balls win a prize). ),
The time from when the predetermined period elapses until the variable winning means enters the second state is sufficient time for the game medium to win the specified number of prizes (for example, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened). (For example, it is a sufficient period of time to count from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize),
When the variable winning means is in the first state, when the award amount display before the predetermined period is not displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted, and the award amount display after the predetermined period is not displayed. 15-9 (c-16) to (c-19). ), the production effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and the production effect is started only after the number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time, as shown in Figures 15-11 (c-20) and (c-22). (such as making the lamp 9 emit light),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
Until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the variable winning means has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare effect). ), and at the same time as the display of the awarded amount starts to be displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round game display that can identify the round game being executed and an in-round effect corresponding to the round game can be executed. (For example, displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of wins, and displaying the jackpot effect after a predetermined period of time)
The light emitting means is caused to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the mid-round performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot performance (e.g., to make the production effect lamp 9 emit light),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, the performance can be made more exciting at once at the timing when the performance is executed during the round, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
Further comprising a general prize winning means (for example, general prize winning hole 10, etc.) in which game media can be won,
The display means is
The amount of gaming value awarded as a result of a game medium winning in the general winning means can be displayed as the awarded amount display (for example, in response to a winning in the general winning hole 10, a number of winnings display may be displayed). ),
If the game medium does not win in the general winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after the predetermined period has elapsed, If a game ball does not enter the general winning hole 10, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded),
If the game medium enters the general winning means within the predetermined period, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a display corresponding to the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning means is displayed as the award amount display (for example, the grand prize opening is in an open state). If a game ball wins in the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period after , "0003" will be displayed as the number of wins after the predetermined period has passed, corresponding to the winning in the general winning hole 10. ),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, since a display corresponding to winning in the general winning means is also displayed regarding winnings in the general winning means during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent anxiety from being caused to the player.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the gaming area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the gaming area on the right side),
The display means is
A first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot) can be displayed at the same timing as the award amount display,
The first image is displayed with an effect at the same timing as the award amount display during the advantageous state (for example, an effect display that moves a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot),
The effect display is displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, as an effect display, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot is moved toward the back right, the front, and the back left, and is displayed in a manner that suggests a right-handed hit. Such),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, the game area where the shot should be fired is suggested by the effect display, making it easier for the player to recognize the game area where the shot should be fired.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for performance control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
sound output means;
a display means;
a variable winning means that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
a control means capable of executing a round game that changes the variable winning means to the first state;
Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a first suggestion performance, a second suggestion performance, a third suggestion performance, and a fourth suggestion performance as the suggestion performance suggesting control to be in the advantageous state. and,
The first development performance can be executed before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is announced, and the first development performance can be performed after the fact that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state as a performance result of the second suggestion performance is announced. A development performance execution means capable of executing a second development performance different from the first development performance;
a chance-up performance execution means capable of executing a chance-up performance with different expectations to be controlled to the advantageous state depending on the number of times the suggestion performance is executed;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is
The third suggestion performance can be executed after the first development performance is executed,
The fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the second development performance is executed,
The chance up effect execution means is
The number of times the chance-up effect is executed while the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times the chance-up effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned chance-up production as follows,
The number of executions of the chance-up effect executed when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is set to be equal to or less than the number of executions of the chance-up effect executed when the second suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned chance-up production,
When the round game is played, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the amount to be awarded regarding the amount of gaming value to be awarded is displayed and the round game is in progress. Displays a round display that suggests that
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that no gaming value has been awarded can be displayed as the award amount display;
The gaming machine is capable of displaying a count-up display when the game medium enters the variable winning means within the predetermined period, unlike when the game medium does not enter the variable winning means within the predetermined period .

Images